Home

INR-SI47-1094c_E - Fuji Electric GmbH

1. Svat Switching at approx CUtput trequency Current alarm code aoe 1 second intervals EEE m gt D_i lt gt iLi E g LiL i Item Switching at approx Output current ae second intervals Hui gt JH Item Switching at approx Error sub code Cai 1 second intervals rn DZ lt 4 Li Ao J a P Most recent alarm code gt Eg au Same as above E B c Same as above E g 2 Lu E A 3rd recent alarm code gt Same as above E g 3044 lt a Ei List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an alarm occurred Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 28 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on Check the following prior to powering on 1 Check if connection is correct Especially check if the power wires are connected to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N and output terminals U V and W respectively and that the grounding wires are connected to the ground electrodes correctly Refer to Figure 4 1 A WARNING e Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Otherwise the inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON Be sure to connect the groundin
2. p pie rimda r oe a Elz 21212 1 Power su pply voltage Three phase 200 V Inverter type FRN3 7E1S 20 FRN3 7E1S 40 FRN4 0E1S 4E FRN2 2E1S 70 Three phase 400 V Single phase 200 V The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Unit mm 220 205 2 R3 Main nameplate L8 Power supply voltage Inverter type FRN5 5E1S 20 FRN7 5E1S 20 FRN5 5E1S 40 FRN7 5E1S 40 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V B 220 y 195 x 12 196 12 L985 965 _ 11 2 Tad A legs i 260 238 Main nameplate 12 Power supply volta
3. Power suPPIY voltage Inverter type FRN11E1E 20 FRN15E1E 20 Note A box Q in the above table rePlaces A C J or K dePending on the shiPPing destination Three Pnase 200V 220 250 ai Qo OD Z HEHE 332 302 5 es FA 2x8 3 Vv m Power suPPly voltage lnverter type raran Ti pe oof FRN11E1E 40 FRN15E1E 40 Tnree Phase 400V Note A box Q in the above table rePlaces A C E J or K depending on the sniPPing destination 8 13 8 5 3 Standard keypad Unit mm 51 44 3 79 2 68 8 5 2 ee a a TE CU a al o Ml E 51 05 15 08 st Panel PE cutout ai 2XM3 Os z ND t J Pr 45 l For remote operation or panel wall mounting 8 14 8 6 Protective Functions Name Overcurrent protection Short circuit protection Ground fault protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Input phase loss protection Output phase loss protection Overheat protection LED Alarm monitor output displays 80A B C Description mur I LIL I Yes Stops the inverter output to protect the During inverter from an overcurrent resulting from acceleration overload Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from overcurrent due to a shor
4. 1 7 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW 2 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 3 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 440 V 4 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 5 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 6 In the case of inverters with a capacity of 15 kW at an ambient temperature of 45 C or above this overload capability is assured provided that the inverter has run continuously with 85 of the rated current 7 Max voltage V Min voltage V Volt oltage unbalance phase average voltage V 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 8 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 9 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 10 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 11 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination
5. 3 Leakage current A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching ON OFF inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occur take an appropriate measure against them Table 2 11 Leakage Current Countermeasures Problem Measures A residual current operated Decrease the carrier frequency protective device RCD or Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter earth leakage circuit breaker Use an RCD or ELCB with lower sensitivity than the one currently ELCB that is connected to used the input primary side has tripped Use an RCD or ELCB that features measures against the high frequency current component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay Decrease the carrier frequency was activated Increase the settling current of the thermal relay Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter instead of the external thermal relay 2 28 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad 7 segment LED consists of a four digit LED monitor Monitor LED six keys and five LED indicators indicators The keypad allows you to run and He O stop the motor monitor running ODE status and switch to the menu mode In the menu mode you can set th
6. gt Lower the value for torque boost F09 and AO5 if the motor is not going to stall Check that the motor generates enough torque required during deceleration time was acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the too short moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 gt Enable current limiter F43 and torque limiter F40 and F41 gt Raise the inverter capacity 6 Malfunction caused by Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct noise 2 Gun Overvoltage Problem Possible Causes 1 The power supply voltage was over the range of the inverter s specifications grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage mui LILI i Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration ic Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration UW 11 LILia Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within that of the specifications 6 11 Possible Cause
7. 7 6 Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit E DC link bus Input primary side Output secondary side voltage gt P N c Voltage Current Voltage Current a AL ll VV Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter AR AS AT VR Vs VT WR WT Au Av Aw Vu Vv Vw Wu Ww V Name of meter ae Rectifier or Digital a Hae oe Moving iron moving iron AC power Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC Moving coil type type power meter power meter power meter type M Note It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged Type of meter Symbol of meter Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters T 1 7 5 Insulation Test Because an insulation test is made in the factory before shipment avoid a Megger test If a Megger test is unavoidable follow the procedure below Because a wrong test procedure will cause breakage of the inverter take sufficient care A dielectric strength test will cause breakage of the inverter similarly to the Megger test if the test procedure is wrong When the dielectric strength test is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit 1 Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the ma
8. 8 2 8 1 3 Single phase 200 V class series pte Specifications O OO OS S O Type FRN__ _E1S 70 0 1 0 2 0 4 Nominal applied motor kW 0 1 0 2 0 4 Rated capacity kVA 0 3 0 57 1 1 Rated voltage V Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function 0 8 1 5 3 0 0 7 1 4 2 5 Rated current A Output ratings Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 for 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Single phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 10 Frequency 5 to 5 with DCR 1 1 2 0 3 5 without DCR 1 8 3 3 5 4 Required power supply capacity kVA 6 0 3 0 4 0 7 Torque 7 100 Torque 8 150 DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Rated current A 5 ty 2 Q a a a Z Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Mass kg 0 6 1 8 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 k
9. Main circuit power input wires broken The terminal screws for the main circuit power input of the inverter were not tight enough Interphase unbalance rate of three phase voltage was too large Overload cyclically occurred Single phase voltage was input to the three phase input inverter instead of three phase voltage input What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage to find where the peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections Measure the input voltage and check the voltage variation gt Reconsider the power system configuration Check if the alarm occurs when you switch on a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the wires Check if the screws on the inverter input terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Raise the inverter c
10. 1 Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops according to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic energy losses When reducing the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor Note according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Data for H12 Function Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Enable The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 The current limiter F43 F44 implements the current control by software so an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limiter F43 F44 also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extrem
11. A19 Online tuning A20 No oad current 0 01 Rated value lt N of Fuji standard motor A21 0 00 to 50 00 2 3s Rated value of Fuji standard motor 0 00 to 50 00 0 01 al Rated value of Fuji standard motor 100 0 0 50 100 0 Rated value 0 to 200 0 01 to 10 00 0 to 200 0 lt 3 Slip compensation gain for driving Y Y1 Y Slip compensation response time 0 01 Y lt 2 z lt z z lt lt z lt z z z z z z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 5 2 lt lt P a Slip compensation gain for braking Hz N gt N gt 0 01 z Rated slip frequency lt N of Fuji standard olo lole f 5 R gi f o 2 gt N a motor lt Motor 2 Selection Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series lt N Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors Slip Compensation 2 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Operating conditions Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Damping Gain for Motor 2 A45_ Cumulative Motor Run Time2 Change or reset the cumulativedata Jo TE UN A46 Startup Times of Motor2 Indication of cumulative startup times T r S on 5 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 2 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity
12. Data for J66 Applicable operation mode 0 Takes effect in the constant speed or deceleration operation mode 1 Takes effect in the constant speed operation mode 2 Takes effect in all the operation modes E Timer J67 J67 configures the timer to suppress any activation of the overload stop function by any unexpected momentary load fluctuation If an activation condition of the overload stop function is taken for the time specified by the timer J67 the inverter activate it in case of J65 1 or 2 If J65 3 the timer setting is ignored In this case the inverter decelerates the motor instantaneously with the torque limit function so that referring to the timer is to interfere running of this function Note J68 to J72 Braking Signal Brake OFF current Brake OFF frequency Brake OFF timer Brake ON frequency and Brake ON timer These function codes are for the brake releasing turning on signals of hoisting elevating machines 5 74 Releasing the Brake The inverter releases the brake Terminal command BRKS ON after checking torque generation of the motor monitoring whether it applies both the output current and frequency to the motor which are higher than ones specified for the time long enough Function code Name Data setting range 0 to 200 noe erase oy Culrent Set it putting the inverter rated current at 100 J69 Brake OFF frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz J70 Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Turning on the brake
13. Inverter outputs Connect a three phase motor P1 P DC reactor Connect an optional DC reactor DCR for improving power connection factor P P DB DC braking resistor Connect an optional braking resistor N P DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter s An optional regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals 8c Grounding for Grounding terminals for the inverter s chassis or case and inverter and motor motor Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding terminal of the motor Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function equivalently 2 11 Follow the procedure below for wiring and configuration of the inverter Figure 2 9 illustrates the wiring procedure with peripheral equipment Wiring procedure M Grounding terminals G Inverter output terminals U V W and G 3 DC reactor connection terminals P1 and P DC braking resistor connection terminals P DB DC link bus terminals P and N Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N Perform wiring as necessary E g FRNO 75E1S 2A inverter s Power supply Note DO not connect more than 2 wires to the Molded case terminal P circuit breaker MCCB or Residual current operated protective device RCD Earth leakage circuit ao breaker ELCB Tuy with overcurrent protection M
14. 1 The characteristics of electronic thermal did not match those of the motor overload 2 Activation level for the electronic thermal relay was inadequate 3 The acceleration deceleration time was too short 4 Load was too heavy 11 Gid Overload Problem Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications 2 The torque boost setting F09 and A05 was too high 3 The acceleration deceleration time was too short 4 Load was too heavy 5 Air vent is blocked Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 or motor 2 activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 and A39 A06 and A08 gt Use an external thermal relay Check the continuous allowable current of the motor gt Reconsider and change the data of function codes F11 and A07 Check that the motor generates enough torque for acceleration deceleration This torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using E34 Overload Early Warning In winter the load tends to increase Temperature inside inverter rose abnormally What to Check an
15. E Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan Data for F10 Function 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency 5 25 The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors 1 through a3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 fb Base frequency Even if the specified base frequency exceeds 60 Hz fb 60 Hz Output frequency 0 f2 f3 fo fo Hz Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 selection 0 or 4 Nominal Reference current Output frequency for Characteristic l Thermal time l ie o applied for setting the motor characteristic factor factor constant t motor Factory default thermal time kW y constant Imax 0 1 to 0 75 1 5 to 4 0 Allowable 5 5 to 11 continuous curren
16. If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth to remove dust and use a vacuum cleaner 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts Each part of the product has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced as specified below When the replacement is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fan 10 years Note These replacement intervals are based on the estimated service life of the inverter at an ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load In environments with an ambient temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may need to be reduced Standard replacement intervals mentioned above is only a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 1 Viewing data necessary for judging service life Measurement procedures Through Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode you can view on the keypad various data as a guideline necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus capacitor electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan are approaching their service life 1 Measuring the capa
17. Not canceled even if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Enabling the anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration time When a braking unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control Note 5 70 H70 Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload with an alarm indication of Li or LiL Li respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops Data for H70 Function 0 00 Decelerate the motor by selected deceleration time 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 999 Disable overload prevention control CNo A In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in the load the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled H71 Deceleration Characteristics Setting the H71 data to 1 ON enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip wi
18. Q Note large amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm ur LiL Li With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 E Motor sound Tone F27 F27 changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor If the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or Note mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor F29 to F31 Analog Output FM Mode selection Voltage adjustment Function F33 Analog Output FM Pulse rate These function codes allow terminal FM to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog D
19. is reasonable gt Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter in F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration gt Increase the deceleration time F08 and E11 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In the case of a fan or a pump load lower the setting data of the F15 Frequency limiter High In winter the load tends to increase Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost F09 and A05 is increased gt Increase the value of the torque boost F09 and A05 Check that there is no noise in the external signal wires gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded wire or twisted wire for the control signal wires gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the torque switching signal TL2 TL7 is correct gt Reconfigure data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to the factory default gt Switch correctly the torque switching terminal TL2 TL1 gt Lengthen the acceleration deceleration time F
20. motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm i7iz and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to C IP immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a peripheral equipment 5 43 m Ready for jogging JOG Function code data 10 This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging Simultaneous keying N keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command however it is restricted by the run command source as listed below When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 Input See A keys on the keypad Inverter running state Pressing these keys toggles between Normal operation OFF the normal operation and ready for jogging Ready for jogging When the run command source is digital input F02 1 Input eee A keys on the keypad Inverter running state ON Ready for jogging Disable OFF Normal operation Jogging operation Pressing the key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging For the jogging by the keypad the inverter jogs only when the key is held down Releasing the kuy key decelerates to stop During jogging the frequency specified by C20 Jogging Frequency and the acceleration dece
21. respectively 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad Note 2 MCCB or Note 3 Power supply RODIN MC AEN e1 iT Single phase EESE Lin NDER 200 V class series 8 200 to 240 V L2 N 50 60 Hz a ame ae Power Note 3 Three phase MCCB or Note 3 200 V class series PROPELER per Lele 200 to 240 V ae ape ce ae L1 R U G Mot Three phase L2 S V O 400 V class series oeo 380t0480V T A TSA Olat 50 60 Hz Grounding terminal 1 G ce Grounding terminal e ee ea Control circuit prisl PTC 12 11 Sws c1 o C1 e W7 o 11 V2 FMA soc pa FM 30B _ Alarm output Meter 30130A I for any fault Ar FMP SW6 9 FWD Y1 o REV Y2 o Transistor output 9 CM SINK CMY gt MCCB Molded case circuit breaker x1 tee RCD Residual current operated p X2 protective device PX sw1 ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker X4 MC Magnetic contactor i J X5 DCR DC reactor i 7 CM DBR Braking resistor RS 485 port PLC option Note 1 When connecting an optional DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Note 2 Install a recommended MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ens
22. 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings e Input impedance 22kQ e The maximum input is 15 VDC however the current larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC e Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input current e 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation e 20 to 4mADC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings e Input impedance 250Q e Maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage e Oto 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation e 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings e Input impedance 22 kQ e Maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC lt Control circuit gt 10 VDC Temperature Coefficient thermistor for motor protection The figure shown below illustrates the internal ped a PTC circuit diagram To use ther
23. A 7 D z fe 2 pa a Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Mass kg 14 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 In the case of inverters with a capacity of 15 kW at an ambient temperature of 45 C or above this overload capability is assured provided that the inverter has run continuously with 85 of the rated current 6 Max voltage V Min voltage V Voltage unbalance x oes a Three phase average voltage V 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 7 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 8 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 9 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 10 Average braking torque obt
24. C41 C43 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset and Filter time constant C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment C33 C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises increase the time constant 5 55 P01 Motor 1 No of poles P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion PARRI 120 Motor speed r min No of poles x Frequency Hz P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data for P02 Remarks When P99 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 When P99 1 P03 Motor 1 Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters a
25. Hz Non linear Non linear Base Maximum V f pattern 1 V f pattern2 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 FO7 Acceleration Time 1 F08 Deceleration Time 1 E10 Acceleration Time 2 E11 Deceleration Time 2 FO7 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 HZ Acc time 1 Dec time 1 F07 Maximum F08 i frequency F03 Starting i Bed Stop frequency frequency 17777 A F25 F23 7 ln Actual Actual acc time dec time 5 22 e If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration Chote deceleration in Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than the specified times Refer to the description of HO7 for details e Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one e Acceleration time 1 F07 F08 and deceleration time 1 E10 E11 is switched by terminal command RT1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 e Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 and acceleration deceleration time 2 Tip E10 E
26. Motor cable shielded Control wires shielded For FRNO 75E1E 70 a ring core comes with the inverter Figure 10 2 Connecting Shielded Cables 5 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10 3 Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and enclosure electrically and ground the motor and enclosure Note Metal Enclosure MCCB or RCD ELCB Power supply FRENIC Multi L1 R L1 L U Three or single phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 10 3 Installing the EMC Filter Built in Type of Inverters into a Metal Enclosure 10 3 E In the case of inverters with an external EMC compliant filter optional 1 Install the inverter and the filter on a grounded metal plate Use a shielded cable also for connection of the motor Make the cables as short as possible Connect the shield wire firmly to the metal plate Also connect the shield wire electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor For the inverters from 5 5 to 15 kW install them in a metal enclosure to comply with the EMC directive 2 Use shielded wire for connection around the control terminals of the inverter and also for connection of the signal cable of an RS 485 Communications Card As with the motor clamp the shield wire firmly to a grounded plate 3 If noise from the inverter excee
27. Note 5 By ak 4 Contrel circuit Potentiometer power supply f i ep 13 PTC f 251 bs Voltage input for setting et ee ee 12 DCO to 10 V 1 i 9114 Analog eee SwWws C1 input ony Current voltage input gt C1 z oe for setting aay 11 V2 DC 4 to 20 mA DCO to 10 V L a FM cae 30B Alarm output Meter E Rai 2 B30 30A for any fault Se FMP SW6 mn Y1 Y2 Transistor output TA CMY gt 7 Digital input i MCCB Molded case circuit breaker ie RCD Residual current operated Note 6 lt protective device pari n ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker 9 PLC P MC Magnetic contactor DCR DCreactop 0 0 0 ee DBR Braking resistor When connecting an optional DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Install a recommended MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install an MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD ELCB when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 Frequency can be
28. Note The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and check the accumulated run time of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards This value is calculated from the cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor The value is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours 7 5 Cooling fan Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information and check the accumulated run time of the cooling fan The inverter accumulates hours for which the cooling fan has run The display is in units of 1000 hours The accumulated time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be significantly affected by the temperature and operation environment 2 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 you can get an early warning of lifetime alarm at one of the transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 and the relay contact terminals 30A B C as soon as any of the conditions listed under the Judgment level column has been exceeded When the replacement data
29. _ Through a multi function keypad you can add or delete function codes that are subject to TIP Quick Setup For details refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi function keypad they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad To restore the function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults initialize the whole data using function code HO3 data 1 3 13 Figure 3 2 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup She Programming mode Menu List of function codes Function code data Figure 3 2 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 3 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default WIO keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example Zc is displayed 2 If anything other than ic is displayed use the and Q keys to display Fnc 3 Press the key to proceed to a list of function
30. keys Change certain function code data Refer to Programming codes F00 H03 H45 H97 J75 and J77 in mode Q keys Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 6 Switch to Programming mode without resetting Aarm mode j keys alarms currently occurred 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Multi features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also monitor the running status in real time E Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 5 Protective Functions 3 2 Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Running mode Programming mode Power ON Run stop of motor Setting of function codes Monitor of running status Monitor of various inverter status Menu driven Speed monitor Hz E g Quick Setup Menu 0 GFrac Output current A Eg 234 Data Setting Input power kW Eg Menu 1 Data Setting Output voltage V Eg anu M
31. supply in Overvoltage Category Ill or to connect the three phase 400 V class series of inverters to the power supply in Overvoltage Category II or IIl a supplementary insulation is required for the control circuitry When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m you should apply basic insulation for the control circuits of the inverter The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 3000 m vi Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ACAUTION 10 Use wires listed in IEC60364 5 52 Recommended wire size mm 1 Main circuit k Rated current A DCR of Inverter type MCCB or RCD ELCB Power supply voltage 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 FRNO 1E1 20 FRNO 2E1 20 FRNO 4E1 20 FRNO 75E1 20 FRN1 5E1 20 FRN2 2E1 20 FRN3 7E1 20 Three phase o eo E s 6 a0 60 Three phase 0 75 1 5 2 2 Single phase j oO gt N 5 5 10 25 P 15 20 20 30 30 50 4 0 0 75 50 10 75 16 5 7 z 30 4 0 ire 5 v r 20 30 4 0 30A L1 L L2 N Braking lcs Grounding G U V w resistor ae FRN11E1 20 FRN15E1 20 75 FRN7 5E1 40 11 FRN11E1 40 Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S Standard type or E EMC filter built in type depending on the product specifications depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details power inp
32. the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting e The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor F50 F51 l l ia Discharging capability and Allowable average loss These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss respectively Those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor as listed on the following pages Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the C Note electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm A even if the actual temperature rise is not enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes 5 38 The table below lists the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models E External Braking Resistors Standard models The thermal sensor relay mounted
33. the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 110 J as D y 6 5 97 65 L D1 _ D2 Tit 4 5x6 Oblong hole Main nameplate Power supply Dimensions mm voltage Inverter type D D1 D2 Three phase FRNO 4E1S 40 40 86 400 V FRNO 75E1S 40 64 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination Unit mm 110 7 D p 6 5 _ 97 les L D1 D2 Th 4 5x7 Oblong hole Ce Main nameplate Power suppl Dimensions mm elses y Inverter type D e Three phase FRN1 5E1S 20 200 V FRN2 2E1S 20 150 Three phase FRN1 5E1S 40 64 400 V FRN2 2E1S 40 Single phase 200 V FRN1 5E1S 70 160 96 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K
34. turn SW3 to ON Switches the output mode of the output terminal FM between analog voltage and pulse output When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code F29 a eee Analog voltage output Factory default Current output Switches property of the input terminal C1 for C1 V2 or PTC When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code E59 and H26 es Analog frequency setting in current C1 Factory default E Data for Data for E59 H26 1 Analog frequency setting in voltage PTC thermistor input 2 23 Figure 2 22 shows the location of slide switches for the input output terminal configuration Switching example Sw3 OFF t Factory default SR SW7 swe Swi FMAFWP Ci V2 IOFF ONISINK SOURCE SW1 30A 30B 30C SINK Factory qm default i SOURCE a gt U For inverters FRN E destined for EU the SW1 factory default is SOURCE Figure 2 22 Location of the Slide Switches 2 24 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection 1 Mounting style You can mount a keypad in any style described below m Mount
35. 1 1 3 Function codes and their data that you changed from the factory defaults Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 3 4 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 5 Date of purchase 6 Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 7 Production year amp week Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 7 6 2 Product warranty To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric products Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract catalog specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below In addition the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used etc and may require periodic inspection Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company Furthermore regarding purchased products and delivered products we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products 1 Free of charge warranty period and warranty range 1 Free of charge warranty period 1 The product warranty period is 1 year from the da
36. 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and accessories below are contained in the package e Cooling fan fixing screws for inverters of 5 5 to 15 kW e Keypad rear cover with fixing screws e Instruction manual this manual 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the model you ordered You can check the model name and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the following page FG Fuji Electric TYPE INS SBE1S 4E rr SOURCE 3PH 380 480V 50Hz 60Hz 17 3A OUTPUT APH 55kW G80 480V O 1 400Hz 13A TYPE FRN5 SETS 4E PE P30 Imin SER No W05A123A0001Z ode SERNo WO5A123A0001Z WF a Main Nameplate b Sub Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter FRN 5 5 E1S 4E11 Code Series name Code Built in option FRN FRENIC series 1 None 2 RS 485 communications card Code Nominal applied motor Po Pe intedaes cad 0 1 0 1 kW Code Brake 0 2 0 2 kW ener a aae 0 4 0 4 kW w o braking resistor standard 0 75 0 75 kW Code Shipping destination 1 5 1 5 kW Instruction manual version A Asia English 2 2 2 2 kW C China Chinese 3 7 3 7 kW 55 5 5 KW E EU English 7 7 5 kW J Japan Japanese K Taiwan and Korea English J JER Code P It 15 1
37. 2 14 4 4 2 15 9 1 8 0 5 0 5 TE FRN5 5E1E 20_ Output 33 6 3 8 E i Inverter type A Z Oo _ m m N O TININ 7 DivnaIA yA Ziziziti zd gt ojojo OINIATITIN mI miIim m Elmli SaaS oO Three phase 200 V T P3 Z N N aN m ND Oo ow TN oa ajs lsfelafa lele A Input 16 2 1 8 N FRN7 5E1E 20 Q FRN11E1E 20 Output 51 3 5 8 Input 72 0 8 1 N ol FRN15E1E 20 T T J J Zz Z So w P N m m i m m A N O O li wm NIDI Ziziz No o N OTN mim a MT mim gt Bale oO N oO 4 4 E 14 20 0 5 0 5 8 Note A box O in the above table replaces any of the following alphabets depending on the shipping destination A C J or K for three phase 200 V class series of inverters and FRN3 7E1S 40 A C E J or K for single phase 200 V and three phase 400 V class series of inverters except FRN3 7E1S 40 FRNS 5SE1E 40 Output 33 6 3 8 Three phase 400 V FRN7 5E1E 40 Input 16 2 1 8 A a ox oO o gt FRN11E1E 40 Output 51 3 5 8 5E1E 15 9 1 8 14 TEIE 20 0 5 0 5 2 77 DD Zz zZ KO oN m m m m AA m ajn IJD Ziz izZz SO Oo S NN ees mimm ea m yin in S N 00o on 4 4 zy Z gt N on m m N O Single phase 200 V m 7 JJ ZzZ z ND N a mm mm ya 0o E Precautions for use In running general purpose
38. 2 Display of the LED Monitor after Power on 4 1 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Before running the motor set function code data specified in Table 4 1 to the motor ratings and your system design values For the motor check the rated values printed on the nameplate of the motor For your system design values ask system designers about them For details about how to change function code data refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 1 Setting up function codes quickly Refer to the function code H03 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for the factory default setting of motor parameters If any of them is different from the default setting change the function code data Table 4 1 Settings of Function Code Data before Driving the Motor for a Test Function code Name Cmyon 1 F LIH A Lic Base frequency Rated voltage at base frequency DI NI O L 5 E II LI I1 Motor parameter Rated capacity Motor parameter Rated current Ci g fo 1 q F 99 A 75 Motor selection O 0I 0 T wa 7 L 1 Maximum frequency F Lii Acceleration time 1 F i Deceleration time 1 Tip Function code data Motor ratings printed on the nameplate of the motor System design values For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your system design values If the set time is short the inverter may not start running the motor Factor
39. 3 3 Monitoring Items Continued Display afk sample on LED indicator i Function Monitor items the LED m ON O OFF Unit Meaning of displayed value code E43 monitor 1 PID ON P g7 okz oa okwl PID command feedback amount 10 PID feedback on amount transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g temperature io rot eae Be Refer to function codes E40 and ie E41 for details Timer NRN z OHz OA OkW min Remaining time of timer opera 13 Timer operation 3 tion PID output in as the maximum frequency F03 PID output 3 4 ALL OHz OA OkW being at 100 14 For motor 2 read F03 as A01 Load factor of the motor in as 6 o Load actor OPA Ek the rated output being at 100 19 Motor output T fark OHz OA mkW kW Motor output in kW 16 4 2 3 4 5 6 tu A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so E 4 appear instead When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V These PID related items appear only when the inverter PID controls the motor according to a PID command specified by function code J01 1 2 or 3 The Timer item appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 When the PID control or timer operation is disabled appear When the LED monitor displays a PID comman
40. 300 set F30 data to 33 E Pulse rate F33 dedicated to FMP F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches 100 in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected F40 F41 E16 E17 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting levels for driving and braking Torque Limiter 2 Limiting levels for driving and braking If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the driving torque limiter F40 E16 and the braking torque limiter F41 E17 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall Specify the limiting levels at which the torque limiter becomes activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque To switch the inverter s output torque limiter between torque limiter 1 F40 F41 and iP torque limiter 2 E16 E17 use the terminal command TL2 TL1 assigned to a digital Cr input terminal Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 5 36 The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are Cnote activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters F42 Control Mode Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor Data for F42 Control mode 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive i 2 3 4 Dynamic torq
41. 32 5 55 5 32 5 55 5 32 5 55 5 32 5 55 5 32 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 P codes Motor 1 Parameters g Data Default Data setting range 5 z copying setting ng Y1 4 Y2 No of poles 2 to 22 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 oo 3 gt 36 apa S 2 cel o c D 2 F z 5 5 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 Rated value of Fuji standard Auto tuning Disable Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running Online tuning Disable Enable No4 oad current 0 00 to 50 00 Rated value of Fuji standard motor 0 00 to 50 00 Rated value of Fuji standard 0 00 to 50 00 Rated value of Fuji standard Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 o Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 fe Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Rated value of Fuji standard motor Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series
42. 5 Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 5 15 Table 5 2 2 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity Rated current of Fuji standard motor Nominal Power plied A supply ee Inverter type voltage kW F11 E34 E37 A07 O A O E O C O J K 0 1 FRNO 1E1 20 0 62 0 73 0 68 0 68 15 FRN15E1m 20 50 05 50 14 55 00 55 00 Ssg 7 FRN3 7E1m 40 o oe om 15 FRN15E1m 40 28 11 27 50 28 59 27 50 h 2 2 FRN2 2E1m 7 0 8 39 8 80 9 20 9 20 D oo N N The nominal applied motor rating of the FRN4 0E1 4E destined for the EU is 4 0 kW Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 5 16 E Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when running Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with A and Q keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the key If you press the key without pressing the key to exit
43. FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES and the RS 485 Communications User s Manual MEH448b FOO Data Protection FOO specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command PID command and timer operation from accidentally getting changed by pressing the A Q keys 0 Disable both data protection and digital reference protection allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with the N V keys 1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection allowing you to change digital reference data with the WIO keys But you cannot change function code data except F00 2 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection allowing you to change function code data with the WIO keys But you cannot change digital reference data 3 Enable both data protection and digital reference protection not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the WN Q keys Enabling the protection disables the Q Q keys to change function code data To change FOO data simultaneous keying of Q from O to 1 or WY Q from 1 to 0 keys is required Tip Even when F00 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the communications link For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for
44. Hz N A N A r min r min m min N A N A Description Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Calculated output torque of the motor in Frequency specified by a frequency command Rotational direction being outputted forward reverse stop Running status in hexadecimal format Refer to m Displaying running status on the next page 120 Function code P01 Display value Output frequency Hz x For motor 2 read P01 as A15 Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 The 7 segment letters _ appear for 10000 r min or more If C _i appear decrease function code E50 data so that the LED monitor displays 9999 or below referring to the above equation Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Driving torque limit value A based
45. Input power Inverter type 1 Filter type FRNO 1E1S 20 pRn eee EFL 0 75E11 2 3 0 FRNO 4E1S 20 FRNO 75E1S 20 FRN1 5E1S 20 i FRN2 2E1S 20 EFL 4 0E11 2 3 0 FRN3 7E1S 20 Baal vue EFL 7 5E11 2 11 FRN7 5E1S 40 FRN11E1S 40 EFL 15SP 2 20 FRNO15E1S 40 FRNO 4E1S 40 FRNO 75E1S 40 FRN2 2E1S 40 Three phase FRN3 7E1S 40 400 V FRN4 0E1S 4E FRN5 5E1S 40 FN3011 30 61 0 4 34 FRN7 5E1S 40 NU ee FN301150 62 0 4 FRNO15E1S 400 FRNO 1E1S 70 FRNO 2E1S 70 Single phase FRNO 4E1S 70 30DKCS5 1 0 200 V FRNO 75E1S 70 FRN1 5E1S 70 FRN2 2E1S 70 1 A box O in the above table replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination for three phase 200 V and FRN3 7E1S 40 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination for single phase 200 V and three phase 400 V class series except FRN3 7E1S 40 2 The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three phase 240 V 50 Hz three phase 400 V 50 Hz and single phase 230 V 50 Hz 3 The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line 10 6 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 10 4 1 General comments When you use general purpose industrial inverters in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low voltage power supply it is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inv
46. J67 Functions Restrictions Note To run motor 2 with the M2 M1 terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the M2 M1 should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 10 ms motor 1 will be driven by default E Enable DC braking DCBRK Function code data 13 This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter s digital input Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Function code data 14 This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 and torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 as listed below If no TL2 TL1 terminal command is assigned torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 takes effect by default Input terminal command TL2 TL1 Torque limiter level OFF Torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 ON Torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 m UP Increase output frequency and DOWN Decrease output frequency commands UP and DOWN Function code data 17 18 e Frequency setting When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below UP DOWN l Function Data 17 Data 18 OFF OFF Keep the current output frequency ON OFF Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time c
47. Link Function Mode selection y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Using the RS 485 communications link standard option or field bus option allows you to issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location as well as monitoring the inverter running information and the function code data H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands inverter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link or field bus H30 is for the RS 485 communications link y98 for the field bus Inverter itself ie oe Sia Selected command ig e te ee ee Frequency command i ON Run command Standard RJ 45 RS 485 communications link LO Option card Field bus Option RS 485 communications link the command source selected SEAS If no LE is assigned by H30 y98 will apply bee eee ee Command sources selectable Command sources Description Inverter itself Sources except RS 485 communications link and field bus Frequency command source Specified by F01 C30 or multi frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by F02 Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link option card Via field bus option Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting keypad Via RS 485 communications link option card Via field bus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP 5 68 Comman
48. MC in the primary circuit Protecting the motor It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Consult your Fuji Electric representative for details Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation Use three phase motors Even if a single phase power supply is available use a three phase motor as the inverter provides three phase output Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from 10 to 50 C The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable material such as metal Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker rated current is equivalent to or lower than the recommended rated current If a magnetic contactor MC is mounted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other purpose ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before you turn the MC ON or OFF Remove the magnet contactor MC already installed and built in surge
49. Refer to the description of E30 E Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 m Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given E Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter detects the polarity of the internally calculated torque and issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output This signal comes OFF when the calculated torque is the driving one and it goes ON when it is the braking one E inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms e Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 e Current limiting by software F43 and F44 e Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 e Automatic deceleratio
50. Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the AN Q keys In Programming or Alarm mode the Gig keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed command Q entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 5 Manual Speed Frequency Command Specified with WN Q Keys and Requirements PID control Communi LED Frequency Multi Multi cations Cancel PID Mode i Pressing WO selection monitor command 1 frequency frequency link control keve controls E43 F01 SS1 operation Hz PID y l J01 LE OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command 0 OFF OFF OFF ON Manual speed PID frequency s command set by disabled keypad 1or2 0 OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command Other than the above ON Manual speed PID frequency command currently disabled selected F01 0 Link disabled i LE OFF Manual speed command from keypad SS2 S81 OFF Bo m Frequency setting other Hz PID ON than above i O l Command via link Ui Final frequency command Multi frequency command PID output as frequency command 3 8 E Settings under PID dancer control To enable the PID dancer control you need to set function cod
51. TL7 Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring has been connected to the motor incorrectly 2 Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction command FWD and REV 3 The setting for the rotation direction via keypad operation is incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the respective U V and W terminals of the motor Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV Correct the data of the function codes and the connection Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 Gun E10 keys on keypad forward or 3 keys on keypad reverse 4 Ifthe speed variation and current vibration Such as hunting occur at the constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command fluctuated 2 The external frequency command device was used What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command Check that there is no noise in the control si
52. The acceleration time was too long or too short 6 Overload 7 Mismatch with the characteristics of the motor 8 The current limiting operation did not increase the output frequency What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F03 and A01 frequency gt Readjust the data of F03 and A01 Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter high gt Readjust the data of F15 Maximum Check the signals for the frequency command from the analog input terminals with Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase the frequency of the command gt If an external potentiometer for frequency command signal converter switches or relay contacts are malfunctioning replace them gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 correctly Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency command Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect data of function code e g cancel higher priority run commands etc Check the data of function codes F07 and E10 Acceleration time gt Change the acceleration time to match the load Measure the output current gt Lighten the load Adjust the dumper of the fan
53. To assure the service life of brake body the inverter checks the motor speed lowering enough less than one specified monitoring that the run command turns OFF and the output frequency lowers than one specified for the time long enough and turn on the brake terminal command BRKS OFF Function code Name Data setting range J71 Brake ON frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz J72 Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s CN t e The braking signal control is only applicable to motor 1 If the motor switching function selects motor 2 the braking signal always remains at state of turning on e When an event such as an occurrence of alarm and turning the coast to stop terminal command BX ON shuts down the inverter the braking signal turns on immediately 5 75 Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting A WARNINGA If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to off reset the alarm Note that if the alarm is reset while any run commands are set to on the inverter may supply the power to the motor which may cause the motor to rotate Injury may occur Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T L1 L and L2 N for single phase voltage input voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait more tha
54. and options which can be connected to the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS This chapter describes standards with which the FRENIC Multi series of inverters comply Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents Ti This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or p operations LH This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information XIV Table of Content Preface gt a E i E Safety PreCatllonS viaicissicscscnseiamiainceiarnandeicies i M Precautions for USC cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees xi How this manual is organized cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees xiv Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection cceee 1 1 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 2 1 3 Transportation a gescasacgedvscssstisessdeeceeeisetiienrs 1 3 1 4 Storage Environment eee 1 3 1 4 1 Temporary storage ceeeee 1 3 1 4 2 Long term storage 1 3 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER siete a 2 1 2 1 Operating Environment 2 1 2 2 Installing the Inverter eee 2 1 2 9 Wiring eea e E as Nr aE 2 4 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal cov
55. arrival signal 2 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay 1026 Auto resetting 1027 Universal DO 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning 1030 Service lifetime alarm 1033 Reference loss detected 1035 Inverter output on 1036 Overload prevention control 1037 Current detected 1038 Current detected 2 1042 PID alarm 1049 Switched to motor 2 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor PTC 1057 Brake signal BRKS 1059 Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF 7 1076 PG error detected PG ERR 6 1080 Stop position override alarm OT 6 1081 Timer output TO 6 1082 Positioning completed PSET 6 1083 Current position count overflowed POF 6 1099 Alam output for any alarm ALM Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal E29 Frequency Arival Delay Time 0 01 to 10 00 cot fs y y ow 552 i S e ld a Hysteresis width E31 Frequency Detection FDT 0 0 to 400 0 HEBREERA 5 Detection level E32 Hysteresis width o 0to4o0 _ SSS y Sofe yr Tv Tt E34 Overload Early Waming Current 5 5 52 Detection Level 0 00 Disable Current value of 1 to SMR SS of the inverter rated current E35 imer 0 01 to 600 001 O O O SOSS O EE E E A E37 Current Detection 2 0 00 Disable 0 01 A 5 Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current E38 imer 0 01 t0 600 001 y y Soos y y vo eee O eee Time 1 When you make
56. code FOO Data Protection gt Change the setting of FOO from 1 or 3 to O or 2 Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signals with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the function code data gt Press the key after changing the function code data The inputs to the terminals of FWD and REV commands are concurrently turned ON gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV 6 9 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor E Quick reference table of alarm codes Instantaneous overcurrent mui LILI I TU 11 Liuz Overvoltage TU 11 LILI Undervoltage 6 12 ES 6 19 Input phase loss 6 13 6 20 Output phase loss 6 14 Er i 6 20 GH Alarm issued by an external 6 15 ES device m Motor protection l BTC thermistor BAS Ne ere 6 11 Heat sink overheat 6 14 or RS 485 communications error 6 21 Refer to 6 17 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 19 6 19 RS 485 communications error Option card ghi Braking resistor overheated 6 23 6 23 1 Jn Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level LiL i Overcurrent occurred during acceleration Cee Overcurrent occurred during deceleration LiL a Overcurrent occurred when running at a constant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Sugge
57. codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 2 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 1 to 60 0 0 00 to 10 00 oO 5 34 Y x a gt ojo a 5 5 fo 3 w o H 5 1 F codes continued g Default Refer to Code Data setting range f setting page running Carrier frequency 5 34 F27 Tone Level 0 Inactive Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 F29 Analog Output FM Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA Mode selection Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP F30 Voltage adjustment F31 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings jo Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV F33 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 FMP Pulse rate at 100 output F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Variable torque load 5 23 Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 Constant torque load Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC F39 fStop Frequency 0 00 to 10 00 Holding Time F40 Torq
58. depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 2 10 2 3 4 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or connect the single phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 L and L2 N of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned ON 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection 5 Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring Secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other When wiring the inverter to the power supply insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the devices r
59. digit Table 3 15 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 15 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion Hexadecimal Hexadecimal 7 Li l l Pa T 22 2 2 0O 0O0 0 0 I 3 18 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 16 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 5 Power ON mode a 7O List of I O check items I O data 3 x A By LED segment ON OFF a E LIL I O status in binary format ee AITO TOA ILL Input status in hex format Output status in hex format wy By LED segment ON OFF I O status in binary format la Luu Input status in hex format Cw I LILILt Output status in hex format J Input voltage at terminal 12 V PG pulse rate 2 Z phase p s Figure 3 5 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking 3 19 Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 CS aT A e O N x Sr Sr 5 Turn the inverter
60. for 400 V class series Frequency 0 1 to 400 0 Oe pea ene teenie Healt 0 to 500 cout an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series lt 5 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 2 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 7 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0800 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 5 9 H codes continued g Incre Data Default Refer to Code Name Data setting range Unit ment copying setting page running H54 ACC DEC Time 0 00 to 3600 Jogging operation Se time and DEC time are common H56_ Deceleration Time for Forced Stop l0 00t036000 0 OE 00 to 3600 y so a ic a Initial frequency setting 1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing run command H63 Low Limiter Mode selection 0 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to run If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor q wo jo gt 5 I OD 1 Lower limiting frequency 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter Low 0 1 to 60 0 Slip Compensation 1 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Operating conditions Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disab
61. function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter Listed below are the function codes including those not subject to quick setup available on the FRENIC Multi Table 3 11 Function Codes Available on FRENIC Multi group F codes FOO to F51 Fundamental Functions concerning basic motor running functions E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal Functions concerning the assignment of functions control circuit terminals Functions concerning the display of the LED monitor C codes C01 to C53 Control functions Functions associated with frequency settings P codes P01 to P99 Motor 1 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor H codes H03 to H98 High performance Highly added value functions tunetions Functions for sophisticated control A codes A01 to A46 Motor 2 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor J codes J01 to J92 Application Functions for applications such as PID functions control y01 to y99 Link functions Functions for controlling communication 001 to 059 Optional functions Functions for options Note Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details of the o codes refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option LL For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables
62. instructions for the motor and inverter Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES This chapter provides a list of the function codes Function codes to be used often and irregular ones are described individually Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects an alarm condition In this chapter first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not and then proceed to the troubleshooting items Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes inspection measurement and insulation test which are required for safe inverter operation It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of the product Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter lists specifications including output ratings control system external dimensions and protective functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS This chapter describes main peripheral equipment
63. of any parts exceeds the judgment level this signal comes ON Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm Parts to be replaced Judgment level DC link bus capacitor 85 or lower of the capacitance than that of the factory setting Electrolytic capacitors on the 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time printed circuit boards estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load Cooling fan 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit include harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and calculate in the following formula m Three phase input m Single phase input Electri W i Power factor PAS POWE UY x 100 Power factor Beetle power W x 100 3xVoltage V xCurrent A Voltage V x Current A
64. of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits or damages arising from special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company or damages to products other than this company s products whether foreseen or not by this company which this company is not be responsible for causing 7 10 3 Repair period after production stop spare parts supply period holding period Concerning models products which have gone out of production this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs In addition we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs However if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7 year period For details please confirm at our company s business office or our service office 4 Transfer rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be res
65. on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the motor for overheat so assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below respectively Braking Continuous braking Intermittent braking resistor 100 braking torque Period Less than 100s Resistance Inverter type Discharging Braking Allowable Q Duty Type Qty capability time average loss ED kWs s kW FRNO 1E1 20 90 0 037 37 FRNO 2E1 20 DBO 75 2 100 FRNO 4E1 20 0 044 22 FRNO 75E1 20 45 0 068 18 FRN1 5E1 20 0 075 10 DB2 2 2 40 FRN2 2E1 20 30 0 077 7 FRN3 7E1m 20 DB3 7 2 33 0 093 20 FRN5 5E1m 20 DB5 5 2 20 0 138 FRN7 5E1m 20 DB7 5 2 15 0 188 5 FRN11E1m 20 DB11 2 10 10 0 275 FRN15E1m 20 DB15 2 8 6 0 375 FRNO 4E1m 40 0 044 22 DBO 75 4 200 FRNO 75E1 40 45 0 068 18 FRN1 5E1m 40 1 0 075 10 DB2 2 4 160 FRN2 2E1 40 30 0 077 7 FRN3 7E1 40 FRN5 5E1m 40 DB5 5 4 80 0 138 FRN7 5E1m 40 DB7 5 4 60 0 188 z FRN11E1m 40 DB11 4 40 10 0 275 FRN15E1m 40 DB15 4 34 4 0 375 FRNO 1E1 70 90
66. or the valve of the pump In winter the load tends to increase Check if mechanical brake is working Release the mechanical brake In case auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is under way check whether P02 P03 P06 PO7 and P08 A16 A17 A20 A21 and A22 agree with the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used Make sure that F43 Current limiter mode selection is set to 2 and check the setting of F44 Current limiter level gt Readjust the data of F44 or set F43 to 0 disabled if the current limiting operation is not needed Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 to ensure that the V f pattern is right gt Match the V f pattern values with the motor ratings 6 4 Possible Causes 9 In the torque control mode the output frequency does not increase 10 Bias and gain set incorrectly What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the torque limit switching signal TL2 TL7 is correct gt Reconfigure data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to the factory default gt Switch correctly the torque switching terminal command TL2
67. selected as a PID command S84 or SS8 ON you still can Tip set the PID dancer position command using the keypad PID control PID control Mode Remote LED monitor Multi frequency selection command SV E43 SS4 SS8 with O O key J01 e When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the Gig key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID command currently selected while you cannot change the setting e On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed ii a Decimal point Table 3 6 PID Command Manually Set with WO Key and Requirements J02 PID command by keypad Other than 0 PID command currently selected Other than 0 ON or OFF 3 9 Setting up the primary frequency command with Q and Q keys under PID dancer control When function code F01 is set to 0 N Q keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a primary frequency command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link and multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the AN Q keys In Programming or Alarm mode the Gig keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running
68. set by connecting a frequency setting device external potentiometer between the terminals 11 12 and 13 instead of inputting a voltage signal 0 to 10 VDC O to 5 VDC or 1 to 5 VDC between the terminals 12 and 11 For the control signal wires use shielded or twisted pair wires Ground the shielded wires To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles 8 7 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 1 120 Standard models Unit mm 80 z D z 6 5 67 _ 6 5 D1 3 7 D2 Sle 4 5x6 Oblong hole e o JE 0 o FRENC a y Fe ji H ol Main nameplate Power supply ivereryog Dimensions mm voltage ee WDA 2 FRNO 1E1S 20 92 10 Three phase FRNO 2E1S 20 200 V FRNO 4E1S 20 25 82 50 FRNO 1E1S 70 92 10 Single phase FRNO 2E1S 70 200 V FRNO 4E1S 70 107 25 FRNO 75E1S 70 50 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on
69. the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and or an accident A CAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur Table 2 9 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise 2 16 Classifi cation Analog input Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Power supply for the potentio meter Analog setting voltage input Analog setting current input C1 function Analog setting voltage input V2 function PTC thermistor input PTC function 1 Connects PTC Positive Functions Power supply 10 VDC for frequency command potentiometer Potentiometer 1 to 5kQ The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage e 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation e
70. the earth increases causing it difficult to accurately control the motor speed F43 F44 Current Limiter Mode selection Level When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current Refer to the description of function code H12 If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation E Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Data for Running states that enable the current limiter F43 During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration 0 Disable Disable Disable 7 iat Enable 2 Enable Enable Disable E Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating e Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it Note may cause a delay in control If you need a quick response specify a current limit operation by hardware H12 1 at the same time e If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low
71. the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 Nm in both the acceleration deceleration and constant speed running phases Since increasing the output frequency too much in the anti regenerative control is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data 0 0 to 400 0 Hz makes the anti regenerative control capability high In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor 2 Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 4 Enable
72. to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 5 12 J codes continued Incre Data Default Refer to Code Data setting range Unit f ment copying setting page running J73 Positioning Control Start timer 6 ooto 1000 0 ot Po J74 Start point upper r e99t0999 a rf y J75 Start point lower digits 6 PL 0 t0 999958 tt i ryd ryf o J76 Preset point upper digits 6 999 t0999 a yf y o J77 Preset point lower digits 6 PL 0 to99998 o Sode y y o A Gl EA upper digits 6 aM in 00 0 ee lower digits 6 J80 Creep speed 6 o toa00 te yf o J81 End point upper digits 6 999 to 999 tl y yf o J82 End point lower digits 6 o Jo to9999 tl y y o J83 Positioning allowance 6 o to 9999 tl yf y o J34 End timer 6 0 0 to 1000 0 ot fs y y o J85 Coasting compensation 6 o to 9999 tl ryf y o J86 End point amed a ea o doodo yry yr fi o J87 Preset positioning requirement J88 Position detection direction y o J90 Overload Stop Function P Gain 6 J91 Integral time 6 a e a to 9 999 999 y J92 Level adjustment 6 500001500 OE 0 to 150 0 eae 1o00 6 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 8 P Current position Absolute position Switching between 0 and P require
73. to 0 39 0 40 to 0 74 0 75 to 1 49 1 50 to 2 19 2 20 to 3 69 3 70 to 5 49 5 50 to 7 49 7 50 to 10 99 11 00 to 14 99 15 00 to 18 49 18 50 to 21 99 22 00 to 30 00 5 59 MM When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 200 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0E Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load Rated slip kW applied current current frequency motor A A Hz kW PO2 A16 P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 49 13 35 11 38 1 77 0 10t00 19 0 1 12 10 11 83 0 20t00 39 0 2 11 95 11 93 0 40 t0 0 74 0 4 9 10 12 19 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 7 50 9 30 1 50t0 2 19 1 5 5 39 9 22 2 20t03 69 2 2 5 39 9 12 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 4 0 4 79 9 30 5 50t07 49 5 5 4 34 11 75 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 3 63 11 85 11 00 to 14 99 11 3 04 12 14 15 00 to 18 49 15 2 58 12 98 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 2 29 13 01 22 00 to 30 00 22 70 40 2 12 12 56 400 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0OE vo cosy Year aee neea an ax Rael kW applied q y motor A Hz PO2 A16 kw P03 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 22 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 6 48
74. to UL standards and Canadian standards cUL certification Continued ACAUTION 8 Install UL CSA certified circuit breaker rated 240 V or more for 200 V input 480 V or more for 400 V input between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Standard type Required torque Wire size Ib in N m AWG or kemil mm Main oe Main es Control circuit Control circuit terminal terminal A 44 20 ASD 0 5 0 5 FRN5 5E1S 20 T FRN7 5E1S 20 FRN11E1S 20 PE FRN15E1S 20 40 15 9 1 8 3 5 20 0 4 0 5 FRN5 5E1S 20 12 33 6 3 8 FRN7 5E1S 20 FRN11E1S 20 51 3 5 8 FRN15E1S 20 10 6 1 2 4 4 20 0 5 0 5 159 e 8 0 Note A box O in the above table replaces any of the following alphabets depending on the shipping destination A C J or K for three phase 200 V class series of inverters and FRN3 7E1S 40 A C E J or K for single phase 200 V and three phase 400 V class series of inverters except FRN3 7E1S 40 Inverter type Three phase 200 V Ql O o NIO ol A O k Three phase 400 V on a z N Single phase 200 V N eee eal reoses20 FRNA 0E1S 4E FRNs SEs FRNTSEIS20 Feesn presan wo O Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards cUL certification Continued ACAUTION EMC filter built in type Required torque Wire size Ib in N m AWG or kcmil mm Main Bee ot Main KREN f Control circuit Control circuit terminal terminal 10 6 1
75. to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources Data for E61 ape E62 or E63 Function Description This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added 1 Auxiliary frequency to frequency command 1 F01 It is never added to command 1 frequency command 2 multi frequency command or other frequency commands This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added 2 Auxiliary frequency to all frequency commands including frequency command 2 command 1 frequency command 2 and multi frequency commands This input includes temperature pressure or other 3 PID command 1 commands to apply under the PID control Function code J02 should be also configured 5 PID feedback amount This input includes the feedback of the temperature or pressure under the PID control Not If these terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is on given in the following order E61 gt E62 gt E63 Selecting the UP DOWN control F01 C30 7 ignores auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 E65 Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency When the analog frequency command entered through terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function has dropped below 10 of the expected frequency command within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency When
76. to the terminal to which the Alarm from external equipment has been assigned Any of E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 is set to 9 gt Connect the wire for the alarm signal correctly Check if the Alarm from external equipment has not been assigned to an unused terminal E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the assignment normal negative logic of the external signal agrees with that of thermal command THR set by E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 gt Ensure that the polarity matches 8 GH Motor protection PTC thermistor Problem Temperature of the motor rose abnormally Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the motor exceeded that of motor specifications 2 Cooling system for the motor malfunctioned 3 Load was too heavy 4 The set activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was inadequate 5 APTC thermistor and pull up resistor were connected incorrectly or the resistance was inadequate What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the motor gt Lower the temperature Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using E34 Overload Early Warning In winter the load tends to increase g
77. value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 Y 5 22 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start and stop Deceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 Y Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start and stop Limiting level for driving 999 Disable 999 Disable 6 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 5 3 E codes continued D Default Refer to Code Data setting range i copying setting page running E20 Terminal Y1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to eid We el 5 48 terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C as listed below E21 Terminal Y2 Function 0 1000 Inverter running fr n y 7 E27 _ Terminal 30A B C Function 1 1001 Frequency arrival signal n y 2 1002 Frequency detected 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 1004 Torque polarity detected 5 1005 Inverter output limiting 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure 1007 Motor overload early warning 1010 Inverter ready to run 1021 Frequency
78. 0 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL data 7 to any of the digital output terminals E Current detected and Current detected 2 signals ID and ID2 When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38 the ID or ID2 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level the ID or ID2 turns OFF Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign D data 37 or ID2 data 38 to any of digital output terminals 5 52 saenu kace rE E ky Cy SRESER he ee EE NC E34 E37 x 0 9 Output Current i E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed and line speed as well as for displaying the output status monitored Calculation expression Coefficient for speed indication E50 Frequency x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 Constant feeding rate time min Load shaft speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Line speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Where the frequency refers to the reference frequency to be applied for settings constant feeding rate time l
79. 0 when it is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are ON short circuited and all the others are OFF open 1 15 is displayed on LED4 to LED 1 Digital output terminal Y1 and Y2 are assigned to bits 0 and 1 Each bit is set to 1 when the terminal is short circuited with CMY and 0 when it is open The status of the relay contact output terminal 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is ON Y2 is OFF and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 7 Li i is displayed on the LED4 to LED1 Table 3 18 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED 3 21 Table 3 18 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format Input terminal Output terminal Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 LED3 LED2 LED No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control below E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal format The
80. 0 037 37 FRNO 2E1 70 DBO 75 2 100 FRNO 4E1m 70 0 044 22 FRNO 75E1 70 45 0 068 18 FRN1 5E1m 70 0 075 10 DB2 2 2 40 FRN2 2E1 70 30 0 077 7 The FRN4 0E1 4E is for the EU Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Compact models When using the compact models of braking resistor TK8OW 120Q or TK80W 1009 set F50 to 7 and F51 to 0 033 5 39 10 ED models Power Continuous braking 100 braking torque Period Less than 100 s Braking resistor Intermittent braking supply Inverter type ee Discharging Braking Allowable voltage Type Qty capacity time average loss kWs s kW FRNO 1E1 20 1000 100 FRNO 2E1 20 500 75 DBO0 75 2 1 _ 075 FRNO 4E1m 20 SAR i j 250 37 FRNO 75E1m 20 133 20 FRN1 5E1 20 73 14 DB2 2 2C 40 55 gt 0m0 FRN2 2E1m 20 50 FRN3 7E1m 20 DB3 7 2C 33 75 0 185 FRN5 5E1m 20 DB5 5 2C 20 20 0 275 i FRN7 5E1m 20 DB7 5 2C 15 0 375 FRN11E1m 20 DB11 2C 10 10 FRN15E1m 20 DB15 2C 8 6 FRNO 4E1m 40 250 37 DB0 75 4C 200 50 0 075 5E1m 1 7 14 SES E Wee 160 5 Fe ono FRN2 2E1 40 50 FRN3 7E1m 40 FRNA OE im4e 0B3 7 4C 130 140 75 0 185 FRN5 5E1m 40 DB5 5 4C 80 20 0 275 10 FRN7 5E1 40 DB7 5 4C 60 0 375 FRN11E1m 40 DB11 4C 40 10 FRN15E1
81. 0 1000 1001 1002 S 1003 S 1 2 3 6 T 8 Terminal commands assigned Symbol SS1 SS2 Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps 7 A i 1007 BX 2 o ai 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus LE option 46 1046 Enable overload stop OLS Run forward 98 Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals FWD by E98 and E99 Run reverse 99 Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals REV by E98 and E99 These output signals are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions Note marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON 5 41 Terminal function assignment and data setting E Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps S81 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Function code data 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals S81 SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency O to 15 With this the inverter can drive t
82. 07 F08 E10 and E11 command The terminal command RT1 switching between the acceleration deceleration time 2 and 1 turns ON OFF invalidly gt Turn the RT1 ON OFF validly For reference if RT1 is ON the acceleration deceleration time 2 is applied 6 7 7 Even if the power recovers after a momentary power failure the motor does not restart Possible Causes 1 The data of function code F 14 is either 0 or 4 we 2 The run command stayed off even after power has been restored What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 4 or 5 Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command on While in 3 wire operation the power source to the inverter s control PCB went down because of along momentary power failure or the HOLD signal was turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored 8 Theinverter does not run as expected Possible Causes 1 Wrong configuration of function codes What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that all function codes are correctly configured gt Correct the configurat
83. 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 2 gt an 2 4 Other motors The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup 5 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 2 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 5 8 H codes High Performance Functions Code H03 H04 H05 HO6 H11 H12 H13 H14 H16 H26 H27 H28 Data Default Refer to Data setting range Uni copying setting page Data Initialization 0 Disable initialization N 5 58 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters 5 63 Times 0 Disable 1 times Y Y 1to 10 Reset interval eson r trer a Cooling Fan ON OFF Control 0 Disable Always in operation 1 Enable ON OFF controllable Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 0 Linear 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Curvilinear Rotational Direction Limitation 0 Disable 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure power failure and at normal start Deceleration Mode 0 Normal deceleration Y Y 5 67 1 Coast to stop Instantaneous Overcurrent 0 Disable Limiting 1 Enable Mode selection Restar
84. 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Multi in systems to be certified by UL and cUL If you want to use the FRENIC Multi series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA Standards cUL certified certified product refer to the related guidelines described on page viii 10 2 Compliance with European Standards The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2006 95 EC and Low Voltage Directive 2004 108 EC issued by the Council of the European Communities If connected with a specified external EMC filter Fuji inverters that bear a CE marking but have no built in EMC filter become compliant with these EMC Directives Inverters that bear a CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive The products comply with the following standards Low Voltage Directive EN50178 1997 EMC Directives EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Second environment Industrial Emission See below Capacity of inverter EMC filter 132 KW or below 3 7 4 0 KW 5 5 KW or above Three phase External Category C2 200 V class series Category C3 Three phase Category C3 400 V class series Category C2 Category C3 Single phase Category C3 200 V class series Built in Category C2 CAUTION When you use FRENIC Multi inverters categorized as Category C2 of the EN61800 3 in a domestic environment you may need to take appropriate countermeasures to reduce or elim
85. 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 3 25 16 37 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 2 92 16 58 0 87 22 00 to 30 00 2 70 16 00 0 90 5 60 HM When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 200 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0OC Motor capacity ied curent curent noa motor A A Hz kW P02 A16 P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 0 87 22 00 to 30 00 22 0 90 400 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0OC Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load Rated slip kW applied current current frequency motor A A Hz oe PO3 A17_ PO6 A20 PO7 A21 P12 A26 0 21 0 19 Toroio1e or ose 026 5 50 to 7 49 11 84 7 50 to 10 99 3 15 00 11 00 to 14 99 21 73 15 00 to 18 49 28 59 18 50 to 21 99 35 46 10 17 22 00 to 30 00 5 61 MM When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in t
86. 11 are switched by terminal command RT7 assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 F09 Torque Boost 1 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load FO9 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Data for Torque boost Auto energy F37 V f pattern F09 Applicable load Variable Torque Variable torque load 0 torque V f boost General purpose fans and pumps pattern specified by 1 F09 Disable Constant torque load Linear Constant torque load 2 V f pattern Pen To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Variable Torque Variable torque load 3 torque V f boost General purpose fans and pumps pattern specified by 4 F09 Enable Constant torque load Linear Constant torque load 5 V f pattern a To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Note Ifa required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the rated torque it is recommended to select the linear V f pattern factory default E V f characteristics The FRENIC Multi series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring hi
87. 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics ee Slee ee L l Fae Specified with F12 Driving time of motor min 0 50 100 150 200 Actual Output Current Overload Detection Level x 100 5 27 F14 H13 H14 H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 0 Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Trip immediately undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state 1 Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Trip after recovery undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power from power failur
88. 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any gap between them less than 5 5 kW the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in the panel of your system or other dustproof containers Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 Top 100mm Bottom 100mm Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances E When mounting two or more inverters Horizontal layout is recommended when two or more inverters are to be installed in the same unit or panel If it is necessary to mount the inverters vertically install a partition plate or the like between the inverters so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the ambient temperature is 40 C or lower inverters can be mounted side by side without any gap between them only for inverters with a capacity of less than 5 5 kW E When employing external cooling At the shipment time the inverter is set up for mount inside your equipment or panel so that cooling is done all internally To improve cooling efficiently
89. 3 For inverters with a capacity of 11 and 15 kW To remove the terminal cover first loosen the terminal cover fixing screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the main circuit terminal block cover hold the handles on the both sides of the main circuit terminal block cover and pull it up Terminal cover Terminal cover fixing screw PULL Main circuit terminal block cover Handles Figure 2 7 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of 11 and 15 kW When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover fit it according to the guide on the inverter Insert the main circuit terminal block cover by fitting the part labeled GUIDE according to the guide on the inverter Push where PUSH are labeled to snap it into the inverter Note Figure 2 8 Mounting the Main Circuit Terminal Block Cover For Inverters with a Capacity of 11 and 15 kW 2 6 2 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol G in Figures A to E make no distinction between a power supply source a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit 1 Arrangement of the main ci
90. 40 FRNO 75E1E 40 FRNO 75E1E 70 60 200V D3 Power SUuPDIY Inverter type yoitese wi w2 D 011 55 the shiPPing destination 8 11 Note A box O in tne above table rePlaces A C E J or K dePending on Unit mm s 140 194 6 128 6 p 2x 5 oO y I A pi o O or B vw EMC flange Which comes with the y y inverter as standard d 5 Main namePlate Ciamp for shielded motor cable Ciamp for shielded control cable Fee aes ae Power suppIy Inverter type voltage Three FRN1 5E1E 20 Phase FRN2 2E1E 20 200V FRN3 7E1E 20 FRN1 5E1E 40 Three FRN2 2E1E 40 o Phase FRN4 OE1E 4E Single FRN1 5E1E 70 Phase 200V FRN2 2E1E 70 Tne FRN4 OE1E 4E ts for tne EU Note A box Q in the above table rePliaces A C E J or K dePending on the sniPDing destination For tnree Pnase 200 V class series of Inverters it rePlaces A C J or K 285 Dimensions mm D D1 D2 Power suPPly voltage Inverter tyDe FRNS SE1E 20 T 3 V 1 7 hree Phase 200 FRNV 5E1E 20 213 55 27 5 FRNS 5E1E 40 T p 4 hree Phase 400V FRN7 SE1E 40 208 50 25 Note A box O in tne above table rePiaces A C E J or K dePending on the shiPPing destination For tnree Pnase 200 V class series of inverters it rePlaces A C J or K 8 12 Unit mm
91. 5 and A03 to 0 to improve braking ability Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the alarm occurred gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise DC link bus voltage was below the undervoltage detection level What to Check and Suggested Measures Reset the alarm gt If you want to restart running the motor by not treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 4 or 5 depending on the load Check if the power to the inverter was switched back on although its control PCB was still operating Check whether the LEDs on the keypad light gt Switch the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off Measure the input voltage gt Increase the voltage to within that of the specifications 6 12 Possible Causes 4 4 m Input phase loss Problem Peripheral equipment for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect Other loads were connected to the same power supply and required a large current to start running to the extent that it caused a temporary voltage drop on the supply side Inverter s inrush current caused the power voltage drop because power supply transformer Capacity was insufficient Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5
92. 5 kW ower supply voltage Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V Single phase 200 V 2 4 7 Code Development code Code Enclosure 4 S Standard IP20 E EMC filter built in type IP20 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Note When None and w o braking resistor standard are selected in the built in option and brake in the above codes respectively the type of inverter is written without the last 2 digits as a standard model SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH single phase 1PH input voltage input frequency input current OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output capacity rated output voltage output frequency range rated output current overload capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in kilogram 37 kW or above SER No Product number manufacturing date W05A123A0001Z 019 i week This indicates the week number that is numbered from 1st week of January The 1st week of January is indicated as 01 roduction year Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product 1 1 Code Applicable area E High performance Compact 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views Terminal cover Cooling fans Control circuit terminal block T a 5 wary le plate Sub nameplate Main nameplate Terminal cover
93. 7 1 Daily Inspection 2 4 id ceed dae 7 1 7 2 Periodic Inspection cccccccessseeeeeees 7 1 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts 7 3 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 7 4 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in AEs Te fh Circuit ooreo aie te e Pare een ee mre 7 6 fo UINSUIBUOM TeSt ia 7 8 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 9 7 6 1 When making an inquiry 00 7 9 7 6 2 Product warranty cesses 7 9 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS cee 8 1 8 1 Standard Models cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series 8 2 8 1 3 Single phase 200 V class series 8 3 8 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type cccceeeeeeeees 8 4 8 2 1 Three phase 200 V class series 8 4 8 2 2 Three phase 400 V class series 8 4 8 2 3 Single phase 200 V class series 8 4 8 3 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 5 8 3 1 General specifications of keypad 8 5 8 3 2 Communications specifications of KOV DAG oiicassenigeetsiessantaaaiacetsusdsagiyateaane 8 5 8 4 Terminal Specifications ceeee 8 6 8 4 1 Terminal functions 0 ccceeeee 8 6 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad 8 6 8 4 3 Running the inverter by terminal COMMANGS 2k tte eee ek etek 8 7 8 5 External Dimensions cccccece
94. Application AWARNING e FRENIC Multi is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur FRENIC Multi may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety Though FRENIC Multi is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation A WARNING Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal Otherwise fire could occur Do not place flammable object nearby Doing so could cause fire Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Do not get on a shipping box Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes Doing so could cause injuries When wiring the inverter to the power supply insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operate
95. C voltage or pulse pulse duty approximately 50 The magnitude of such analog voltage or pulse rate is adjustable m Mode selection F29 F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal FM You need to set switch SW6 on the interface printed circuit board PCB Refer to Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter Position of slide switch SW6 Data for F29 Output form mounted on the interface PCB 0 Voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA function FMA 2 Pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP function FMP E Voltage adjustment F30 dedicated to FMA F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected by F31 within the range of 0 to 300 F30 200 F30 100 F30 50 Out of scale 10V ak sae eee ge ae 1 Borers F30 33 E ae eee ee a m Terminal FM output voltage 0 50 100 200 300 Meter scale 5 35 E Function F31 F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal FM Data for F31 10 13 14 15 16 K Note FM output Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV Function Meter scale Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output frequency of t
96. C2 Category C3 EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Category C3 Category C3 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motors Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination Note that the FRN4 0E1E 4 can be followed by E only Other than those items in the above table are the same as those in Section 8 1 Standard Models 8 2 3 Single phase 200 V class series Item Specifications Type FRN_ _ _E1E 70 0 1 0 2 2 2 Applicable motor rating kW 1 0 1 0 2 2 2 Weight kg 0 7 0 7 3 0 EMC Directives Emission Category C2 EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Category C3 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motors Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination Other than those items in the above table are the same as those in Section 8 1 Standard Models 8 4 8 3 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 3 1 General specifications of keypad Table 8 1 General Specifications Items Specification Remarks Protective structure Front side IP40 Back mounting side IP20 Site to be installed In door Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed No corrosive gas no inflammable gas no dust and no prAna direct sunlight allowed Altitude 1000 m or less Note Air pressure 86 to 106 kPa 3 mm maximum amplitude Within 2 to 9 Hz Sbata 9 8 m s Within 9 to 20 Hz RS 2 mis Within 20 to 55 Hz 1 m s Within 55
97. Data Initialization Initialize the motor parameters H03 2 or 3 P03 A17 Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set data Motor Rated current differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor e Upon completion of the initialization the HO3 data reverts to 0 factory default e If the P02 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with HO3 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent nominal applied motor rating see the tables on the next page 5 58 M When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 200 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0OA Nominal Rated No load Rated slip applied current current frequency motor A A Hz kW Motor capacity kW PO2 A16 0 01 to 0 09 0 10 to 0 19 0 20 to 0 39 0 40 to 0 74 0 75 to 1 49 1 50 to 2 19 2 20 to 3 69 3 70 to 5 49 5 50 to 7 49 7 50 to 10 99 11 00 to 14 99 15 00 to 18 49 18 50 to 21 99 22 00 to 30 00 P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 PO08 A22 P12 A26 1 77 400 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0OA Nominal Rated No load applied current current motor A A kw P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 Rated slip frequency Hz Motor capacity kW PO2 A16 0 01 to 0 09 0 10 to 0 19 0 20
98. F In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage I 4 I f Undervoltage level I l ae Time reserved for restart No power gt about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command Gate OFF __ Ready to run I I Waiting for run command for run command State of the inverter Run command ON ON 4 Restart e When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run Q Note command However i
99. FO Instruction Manual High Performance Compact Inverter FRENC Multi J CAUTION Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Multi series of inverters e This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device Fuji Electric Co Ltd INR SI47 1094c E Copyright 2006 2011 Fuji Electric Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Multi series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor for fan and pump applications Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a shor
100. Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 comes ON For details about the operation timings refer to the graph below Frequency command Change the frequency command Reference frequency 1 E30 Reference frequency 1 Reference frequency 1 E30 f Reference frequency 2 E30 f Reference frequency 2 Reference frequency 2 E30 Yu Pees eee ee l _ _ ees Frequency arrival signal FAR ON Frequency arrival l Frequency i delay time E29 M arrival delay gt time E29 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 ON E34 E35 Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level and Timer E37 E38 Current Detection 2 Level and Timer These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning OL Current detected ID and Current detected 2 ID2 output signals E Motor overload early warning signal OL E The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code ii of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F1
101. Hz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination 8 3 8 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type 8 2 1 Three phase 200 V class series Item Specifications Type FRN__ _E1E 20 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 5 5 7 5 11 Applicable motor rating kW 1 l l 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 5 5 7 5 11 Weight kg 3 0 8 0 9 2 4 2 4 5 1 5 3 10 3 EMC Directives Category C2 Category C3 EN61800 3 2004 Category C3 Category C3 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motors Note A box O in the above table replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination Other than those items in the above table are the same as those in Section 8 1 Standard Models 8 2 2 Three phase 400 V class series Item Specifications Type FRN__ _E1E 40 Applicable motor rating kW 1 Weight kg EMC Directives Emission Category
102. LED1 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FW D REV X1 X2 X3 X4 or X5 is closed it goes off when it is open Segment a and b on LED3 light when the circuit between output terminal Y1 or Y2 and terminal CMY and do not light when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C Segment a on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and does not light when it is open Tip If all terminal input signals are OFF open segment g on all of LED1 to LED4 will light PETE Table 3 17 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Segment I I LAILL a No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit O as shown in Table 3 18 An unassigned bit is m7 interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits 2 to each With the FRENIC Multi digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit O and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X5 are assigned to bits 2 through 6 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and is set to
103. Main circuit fastening screw terminal block Terminal cover Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters FRN15E1S 20 2 Warning plates and label FRENIC Multi Warning plate RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK e Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation e Do not remove any cover while applying power and at least 5min after disconnecting power e Securely ground earth the equipment alt BBOStENAY HANWERBORIC BIRR mA CEOPMICHI Ct BEHSLUBRL PMRODUAISR AEREN Eo RICHES IESTE Only type B of RCD is allowed See manual for details 3PH Series TYPE FRNS 5E1S 4E FO SER No WO5A123A00012 7 SUD nameplate Figure 1 3 Warning Plate and Sub Nameplate 3 Terminal block location Terminal cover Control circuit terminal block Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block cover Main circuit terminal block a FRNO 75E1S 20 b FRN15E1S 20 Figure 1 4 Terminal Blocks Note A box O in the above model names replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination 1 2 1 3 Transportation e When carrying an inverter always support its bottom at the right and left sides with both hands Do not hold covers or individual parts only e Avoid applying excessively strong force to the terminal block covers as they are made of plastic and are easily broken 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1
104. N 1 Solid state motor overload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is provided in each model Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level 2 Connect the power supply satisfying the characteristics shown in the table below as an input power supply of the inverter Short circuit rating 3 Use 75 C Cu wire only 4 Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits 5 Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer 6 Short circuit rating Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes 240 volts maximum for Three phase or Single phase 200 V input class when protected by a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes 240 volts maximum Suitable for use on a circuit capable of not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes 480 volts maximum for Three phase 400V input class when protected by a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes 480 volts maximum 7 Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes viii Conformity
105. ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the A and V keys to display I O Checking 4 _ 2 Press the 9 key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g _ LiL Use the and V keys to display the desired I O check item then press the key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 4_ 7 or 4_Z i using the N and Q keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 17 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 18 Press the key to return to a list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 16 I O Check Items LED monitor aai Item Description shows I O signals on the control Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals circuit terminals Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to E Displaying control I O I O signals on the control circuit terminals under ape signal terminals and Displaying control I O signal communications control terminals under communications control on the following pages for details toma 1 LIZ Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V u JI 1_ Li In
106. ON of the terminal X1 is 1 in the input 4 normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa XS Digital 4 The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for Inputs FWD and REV FWD Run Digital input circuit specifications forward command lt Control circuit gt oe REV Run reverse O OFF level command voltage SOURCE 2 18 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Name Functions PLC PLC Connects to PLC output signal power supply signal Rated voltage 24 VDC Maximum 50 mA DC Allowable range 22 to Classifi cation power 27 VDC This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the CM Digital input common transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 Refer to Analog output pulse Tip E Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF output transistor output and relay output terminals in this Section for more Two common terminals for digital input signals These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY Figure 2 16 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure th
107. Operation Method RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by 5 20 terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on me forward 25 0 to 400 0 25 0 to 400 0 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series Maximum Output Voltage 1 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Acceleration Time 1 Q o a 4 4 5 21 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external o L gt e 5 22 soft start 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring external Deceleration Time 1 soft start 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 Note This setting takes effect when F37 0 1 3 or 4 a Torque Boost 1 5 23 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 5 25 Protection for Motor 1 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with 2 an 3s Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 100 00 1 to 135 of the r
108. PID process control you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with Q and Q keys are different from those under regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 you can access manual speed commands frequency command with AN and Q keys if it is set to any other you can access the PID process command with those keys Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 for the details of the PID control Setting the PID process command with the Q and Q keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 Q Q keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID process command with the WO key To enable the PID process command to be modified with the AN Q key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the WIO key to display the PID process command The lowest digit of the displayed command and its decimal point blink 4 To change the PID process command press the Q Q key again The PID process command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID process command source and then go back to the via keypad PID process command Also it is retained in the m
109. Symbol RN oo aR o 1 RUN FAR FDT LU B D IOL IPF OL RDY TRY DO OH 19 1049 swm2 80 1080 Stop position override alarm 2 Bi 1081 2 82 1082 Positioning completed PSET 2 83 1083 Current position count overflowed POF 2 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm 1 These output signals are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0800 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 2 These output signals are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 1007 Motor overload early warning i j D rm E Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating Inverter being stopped 5 49 E Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30
110. Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Environmental Requirements for Storage and Transportation Item Requirements Storage temperature 1 25 to 70 C A location where the inverter is not subject to abrupt changes in temperature that would result in the formation of condensation or ice Relative humidity 5 to 95 2 Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa in storage 70 to 106 kPa during transportation 1 Assuming a comparatively short storage period e g during transportation or the like 2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage 1 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor 2 If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage 3 If the inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 1 4 2 Long term storage The long term storage methods
111. The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables etc specified in the operation manual or catalog etc The breakdown was caused by a chemical or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company s responsibility such as lightning or other disaster 2 Furthermore the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone 3 The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item 1 above and any damages damage to or loss of machinery or equipment or lost profits from the same etc consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty 3 Trouble diagnosis As a rule the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis However at the customer s request this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis In this case the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company s fee schedule 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc Regardless
112. Voltage at Base Frequency 1 FO6 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H50 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H52 H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage with the maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter s input power E Base Frequency 1 F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If O is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than O the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with
113. a especially initializing data was being written 3 The control PCB failed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the cumulative running time of cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if pressing the key resets the alarm after the function code data are initialized by setting the data of HO3 to 1 gt Return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Improve noise control Alternatively return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Initialize the function code data by setting HO3 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 18 13 amp c Keypad communications error Problem A comm
114. achine so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur A WARNING The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE disables the Ero key To enable the key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 If an alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON a sudden start will occur Ensure that the Run command signal is turned OFF in advance Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual and the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops Doing so could cause electric shock e Do
115. agnetic contactor When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR lt Figure 2 9 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment 2 12 D Grounding terminals G Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed to use with a safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Inverter output terminals U V W and grounding terminals G Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the three phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal G CNote The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 50 m when they are connected directly If the wiring length exceeds 50 m an output circuit filter option should be inserted E g total power cable length is 400 m as shown in the figure below e Do not use one multicore cable to connect several inverters with motors even if some possible combinations of inverters and motors are considered No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filte
116. ained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option Note A box O in the above table replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series Pte Specifications OO OS O Type FRN__ _E1S 40 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 4 0 1 5 5 7 5 Nominal applied motor kW 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 4 071 5 5 Rated capacity kVA 3 1 1 1 9 2 8 4 1 Rated voltage V 4 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function Rated current A ca 1 5 2 5 3 7 5 5 Overload capability 6 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 for 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Output ratings Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less Frequency 5 to 5 with DCR 0 85 1 6 3 0 4 4 7 3 10 6 14 4 without DCR 1 7 3 1 5 9 8 2 13 0 17 3 23 2 Required power supply capacity kVA 9 0 6 1 1 2 0 2 9 4 9 7 4 10 Torque 10 100 70 40 20 Torque 11 150 DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Rated current A 8 a fe a J3 2 Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Mass kg
117. al feature must be connected to the primary side commercial power supply side of the inverter when the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply is 2 to 3 Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V In case the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply exceeds 3 you would need to take other measures such as increasing the capacity of the inverter Consult your Fuji Electric representative e Ina DC link bus system using terminals P and N the AC reactor protects the inverter against damage caused by unbalance in current Voltage unbalance A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor and converts it to heat for consumption Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter 9 3 Options for Operation and Communications Other peripheral equipment Other options Name of option External potentiometer for frequency commands Multi function keypad Extension cable for remote keypad operation RS 485 Communications card RS 485 USB converter Inverter support loader software Surge absorbers Surge killers Arresters Frequency meter Panel mount adapter Mounting adapter for external cooling Function and application An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer to control signal ter
118. also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power supply Cc 2 prar Q O Name of option DC reactors DCRs Output circuit filters OFLs Zero phase reactors for reducing radio frequency noise ACL AC Reactor ACR Braking resistors DBRs Function and application A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction for reduction of harmonics 1 For power supply matching Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA In this case the percentage reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF 2 For input power factor correction reduction of harmonics Generally a capacitor is used to correct the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power supply so as to decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines and correct the power factor of inverter Using a DCR reforms the input power factor to approximately 90 to 95 Note At the time of ship
119. an and oO jo Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Shipping Destination Remarks Korea 60 0 50 0 200 For 200 V class series For 400 V class series Refer to page 5 68 Nominal applied motor kW Power supply voltage FRNO 2E1 20 0 20 FRNO 75E1m 20 6 8 0 75 Three phase 200 V FRN5 5E1m 20 5 50 FRN11E1m 20 11 00 Table 5 2 1 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity Fuji s standard Rated capacity of torque boost motor Inverter type kW F09 A05 P02 A16 FRNO 1E1m 20 0 10 FRNO 4E1m 20 0 40 FRN1 5E1m 20 68 1 50 FRN2 2E1m 20 68 2 20 FRN3 7E1m 20 3 70 FRN7 5E1m 20 7 50 FRN15E1m 20 15 00 FRNO 4E1 40 0 40 FRNO 75E1m 40 68 0 75 FRN1 5E1m 40 CY 1 50 Three phase 400 V FRN11E1m 40 11 00 FRN2 2E1m 40 68 2 20 FRN3 7E1m 40 l FRN5 5E1m 40 5 50 FRN7 5E1m 40 7 50 FRN15E1m 40 15 00 FRNO 1E1m 70 0 10 FRNO 2E1m 7 0 0 20 Single phase 200 V FRNO 4E1m 70 0 40 FRNO 75E1m 70 68 0 75 FRN1 5E1m 70 68 1 50 FRN2 2E1 70 68 2 20 The nominal applied motor rating of the FRN4 0E1 4E destined for the EU is 4 0 kW Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time s H13 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 1 0 1 0 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 1 0 1 0 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0
120. and FWD or REV instead of the key command can also start the timer operation Operating procedure for timer operation example Preparation e Set E43 data to 13 LED monitor to display the timer count on the LED monitor and set C21 to 1 Enable timer operation e Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation When the keypad is selected as a frequency command source press the key to shift to the speed monitor and specify the desired reference frequency Triggering the timer operation with the key 1 While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor press the CW key to set the timer for the desired count in seconds Note that the timer count on the LED monitor appears as an integral number without a decimal point 2 Press the key The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down If the timer counts down the motor stops without pressing the key Even if the LED monitor displays any item except the timer count the timer operation is possible After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such as FWD the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor displays Enc and any LED monitor item for the timer count alternately Turning FWD OFF returns to the LED monitor item Note C31 C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset and Filter time constant C36 C38 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset and Filter time constant
121. anguage selection 0 aes 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian Contrast control LED Monitor Speed ea Output frequency Before slip compensation 1 Output frequency After slip compensation Reference frequency Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed in r min Line speed in m min Constant feeding rate time Menu display mode 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 and 1 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 2 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 0 Current input C1 function 4 to 20 mADC 5 53 C1 V2 Function 1 Voltage input V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal 12 Extended Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 5 54 terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function as listed below Terminal C1 Extended Function 0 None C1 function 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 Terminal C1 Extended Function 2 Auxiliary frequency command 2 V2 function 3 PID command 1 5 PID feedback amount Reference Loss Detection 0 Decelerate to stop Continuous running frequency 20 to 120 999 Disable The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 f
122. apacity Measure ripple wave of DC link bus voltage gt If the ripple is large raise the inverter capacity Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power FRENIC Multi of three phase input cannot be driven by single phase power supply Note You can disable input phase loss protection using the function code H98 Protection Maintenance Function 6 13 5 GL Output phase loss Problem Output phase loss Possible Causes 1 Inverter output wires are broken 2 Wires for motor winding are broken 3 The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough 4 Asingle phase motor has been connected occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires Measure the output current gt Replace the motor Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC Multi only drives three phase induction motors 6 GH Heat sink overheat Problem Temperature around heat sink rose Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications 2 Air vent is blocked 3 Accumulated running time of the cooling fan exceeded the standard period for replacement or the cooling fan malfunctioned 4 Load was too heavy What to Check and Suggested Meas
123. art after momentary power failure is selected this function power failure invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a predetermined period Overload In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload prevention condition alarm code 7 or LiL Li the output frequency of control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Hardware error The inverter is stopped when poor connection between the Yes control printed circuit board control PCB and power printed circuit board power PCB interface printed circuit board interface PCB or option card or short circuit between terminals 13 and 11 is detected Note ErH is detected only in turning ON the power supply Mock alarm Simulated alarm is output to check the fault sequence Err Yes PID feedback When the inverter is under PID control detecting a PID Yes wire break feedback wire break stops the inverter output and displays an detection error code L a Not applicable 8 18 Chapter9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the FRENIC Multi Use them in accordance with your system requirements For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Name of peripheral Function and application equipment Molded case MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between t
124. at to Check and Suggested Measures Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated and the real load gt Lower the real braking load gt Review the performance of the current braking resistor and raise it Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required Re estimate the deceleration torque and time needed for the current load with a moment of inertia and a deceleration time gt Lengthen the deceleration time F08 E11 or H56 gt Review the performance of the braking resistor and raise it Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor gt Review data of function codes F50 and F51 then reconfigure them Note The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking load not by measuring its surface temperature Therefore even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise when the use of the brake exceeds more frequently than the one specified by function codes F50 and 51 the inverter issues an overheat alarm To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor configure data of function codes F50 and F51 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor 6 16 10 2 Electronic thermal overload alarm 1 mM d LiL c Electronic thermal overload alarm 2 Problem Possible Causes
125. ate and ready to jog state e Switching between the normal operation state and read to jog state with the keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped Jogging the motor Hold down the key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the 60 A keys simultaneously 4 5 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions Incre Code Data setting range Unit ment runnin FOO Data Protection Disable both data protection and digital reference protection Data Default Refer to copying setting page a aN Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection Enable both data protection and digital reference protection UP DOWN keys on keypad Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function 5 Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control Digital I O interface option Frequency Command 1 ON OJ N gt O PG interface card option
126. ated current allowable continuous drive current of the gt e Overload detection level motor 0 5 to 75 0 0 Disable restart Trip immediately Thermal time constant NG Restart Mode after Momentary Power 5 28 Failure 1 Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Mode selection 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 100 00 to 100 00 1 oO F15 Frequency Limiter High 5 31 Low F18 F20 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency 5 32 5 33 of oO 5 O S O F21 F22 to 100 0 00 Disable Braking level Braking time F23 Starting Frequency 1 F24 Holding time F25 Stop Frequency The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display g If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Shipping Destination on page 5 14 5 Default settings for these function
127. automatically sets these parameters E No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer E R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression R1 Cable R1 R1 V 43x1 x 100 5 56 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A E X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X1 X2x XM X2 XM Cable X on V V3 x1 x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A E Rated slip frequency P12 Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value Synchronous speed Rated speed Rated slip frequency Hz Synchronous speed x Base frequency Note For reactance choose the value at the base frequency 1 F04 P09 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving P10 Slip compensation response time P11 Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually Spe
128. bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Reference frequency A Gain C32 C37 or C42 Point B F18 Point A a O Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C50 C34 C39 or C44 Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 100 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Gain C32 100 Bias F18 0 Analog input 0 1V 10 a 100 Bias Gain base base point C50 point C34 5 32 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale set the gain base point to 50 C34 50 The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any Note base points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P11S series FVR E11S series etc F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level and Brakin
129. blem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor A Q UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor 3 1 Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Continued LED Monitor Keys and LED Functions Indicators RUN LED Lights when any run command to the inverter is active KEYPAD Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by CONTROL LED the key F02 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes you cannot run the inverter even if the indicator lights These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of 3 them indicators Unit KW A Hz r min and m min Unit LEDs Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for 3 LEDs details While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of E Hz Hz and kW light OA Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The FRENIC Multi supports simultaneous keying as listed below The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression Gro F WN keys stands for pressing the Q key while holding down the key Table 3 2 Simultaneous Keying ror A
130. bus H30 0 2 or 6 H30 1 3 or 7 H30 4 5o0r8 H30 0 1 to 8 option y98 2 y98 2 y98 2 y98 3 For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual 5 69 H45 Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock alarm on the LED monitor and issues alarm output ALM to the digital output terminal specified see E20 E21 and E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of key A key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allowing you to reset the alarm Just as for data alarm history and relevant information of those alarms that could occur in running of the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of Ero key A key For details refer to the description of H97 H69 Automatic Deceleration Anti regenerative control Mode selection H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or braking unit if
131. c representative if these terminals are to be used 2 15 Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input or L1 L and L2 N single phase input 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned off before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase input or L1 L and L2 N for single phase input to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Ti It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted that can be manually activated This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing the secondary problems 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals A WARNING In general sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage i e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath or
132. cally attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried Alarm status LED monitor displays Alarm status LED monitor displays UT 1 FW UTI Overcurrent protection 4 4 ii orli d Motor overheated Overvoltage protection 4 4 Lii or CLIJ Motor overloaded Heat sink overheated Inverter overloaded _ L_ LI LILII I E Number of reset times H04 IILILI Lud mot mm oF LiL 1 OFLE IU II LIL LI Braking resistor overheated H04 specifies the number of reset times for automatically escaping the tripped state When H04 0 the auto reset function will not be activated AWARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur E Reset interval H05 After the reset interval specified by HO5 from when t
133. cification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessive compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause a system oscillation so carefully check the operation on the actual machine P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives P99 Motor 1 Selection P99 specifies the motor to be used Data for P99 Motor type 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors Automatic control such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set H03 data Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter When initialization is complete P03 P06 PO7 and P08 data and the old related internal data are automatically updated 5 57 For P99 enter the following data according to the motor type e P99 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors Current standard e P99 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Conventional standard e P99 4 Other motors Other manufacturer s or unknown motors
134. cify positive logic for them e Keep the ambient temperature within 25 10 C 2 Switch ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Switch OFF the main circuit power 5 Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Note If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement will not start Check the conditions listed in 1 6 Once has disappeared from the LED monitor switch ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor 7 4 1 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during power off time under ordinary operating condition If the measuring method for discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation is different from the initial measuring method at the time of factory shipment the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors can not be measured Follow the procedure mentioned below when you measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors under the ordinary operating condition at the end User s installation 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life
135. citance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with that at factory shipment Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below The result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance at the time of factory shipment Procedure for measuring capacitance 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Incase the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional multi function keypad after the purchase put back the original standard keypad e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X5 of the control circuit e fa potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e f an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y1 and Y2 and relay output signals 30A B C will not be turned ON Note f negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Spe
136. codes 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired function code in this example then press the key E a The data of this function code appears In this example data of appears 3 14 5 Change the function code data using the and keys In this example press the A key two times to change data to 6 Press the key to establish the function code data Cen 1 The Siz appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example Li Pressing the key instead of the key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list Cursor movement Tip You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement List of function codes Function code data 7 Sas eae e E Save data and go to the next function code CH i am Figure 3 3 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting in Programming mo
137. content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted LL Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b for details on input commands sent through RS 485 communications and the instruction manual of communication related options as well m Displaying control I O signal terminals on digital I O interface option The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the digital I O interface option just like the control circuit terminals Table 3 19 lists the assignment between LED segments and I O signals Table 3 19 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 II ILI LI AALALA Input terminal Output terminal 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter The menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance information is as same as its of in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function se
138. ctable When you replace an inverter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and set those values to the new inverter s function codes 4 1 4 Testrun A WARNING If the user specifies the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result Follow the descriptions given in Section 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test then begin test driving of the motor A CAUTION If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and determine the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 4 1 Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency Hz is blinking on the LED monitor 2 Set alow reference frequency such as 5 Hz using WIO keys Check that the frequency is blinking on the LED monitor 3 Press the key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the reference frequency is displayed on the LED monitor 4 To stop the motor press the key lt Check points during a test run gt e Check that the motor is running in the forward direction e Check for smooth rotation without motor humm
139. ctory Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 default 0 frequency automatically capacitor phase loss phase loss Data 0 Disable Data 1 Enable Example of decimal expression 19 Enable 1 5 72 Conversion table Decimal to from binary Decimal mney Decimal Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 ra ee i oe 200i an ee s ofofo 7 ee ee s ol ols e lolofi 7 ofols efo o a o a w o i o n ofo o 15 0 Overload Stop J63 to J67 Detection value Detection level Mode selection Operation condition and Timer When the monitored status index of the load exceeds the detection level specified by J64 for the period specified by J67 the inverter activates the overload stop function according to operation specified by J65 Use this function for such as system protection from applying a load that cannot be allowed by the system characteristics or any reason on the system design or system in which the motor spindle is locked by a mechanical stopper M Detection value J63 J63 specifies the detection value of status index to be monitored Data for J63 Detection value Description To improve the accuracy of torque calculation be sure to 0 Output torque auto tune the inverter for the applied motor This setting covers the driving torque only The no load current to the motor always flows Specify J64 1 Output current Detection level correctly considering the no load current of the applied m
140. curely with four screws or bolts so that the logo FRENIC Multi can be seen from the front Note Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally Doing so will reduce the heat dissipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate so the inverter will not run 4 Solving abnormal vibration after installation If any vibration in the surroundings reaches the inverter and causes abnormal vibration to the cooling fans or the keypad fix them firmly using the fixing screws provided as accessories E Fixing the cooling fans Table 2 3 Fixing Screws i Screws Power Momimal Screw Tightening suppl apples IAVENER size torque PPly motor type q voltage accessory N m KW 5 5 FRN5 5E1 20 Three 7 5 FRN7 5E1 20 phase m 500 V 11 FRN11E1m 20 15 FRN15E1 20 55 FRN5 5E1m 40 Three 7 5 FRN7 5E1m 40 phase m 400 V 11 FRN11E1m 40 15 FRN15E1 40 Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Figure 2 3 Fixing the Cooling Fans 2 3 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 1 PULL Removing and mounting the terminal cover and the main circuit ter
141. cy is set at 60 Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through PO3 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the Note overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00
142. d In winter the load tends to increase Check that a mechanical brake is in effect gt Release the mechanical brake if any Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 and A05 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 and A05 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 A02 and AO3 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check that the motor switching signal selecting the motor 2 or 1 is correct and the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal gt Modify function codes to match the connected motor Check whether the frequency command signal is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor gt Change the frequency command signal so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor Check the wiring gt Connect the DC reactor correctly Repair or replace wires for the DC reactor 6 3 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low 2 The data of frequency limiter currently specified was too low 3 The reference frequency currently specified was too low 4 A frequency command e g multi frequency or via communications with higher priority than the one expected was active and its reference frequency was too low 5
143. d Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the panel well Check the setting of FO9 and A05 Torque Boost and make sure that lowering it would not cause the motor to stall gt Adjust the setting of F09 and AO5 Recalculate the required acceleration deceleration torque and time from the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable overload prevention control H70 Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 6 17 Possible Causes 6 The service life of the cooling fan has expired or the cooling fan malfunctioned The wires to the motor are too long and caused a large amount of current to leak from them 12 amp Memory error Problem Possible Causes 1 While the inverter was writing data especially initializing data or copying data power supply was turned OFF and the voltage for the control PCB dropped 2 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter while dat
144. d or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter _ in the lowest digit stands for oy When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 3 5 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands You can set up the desired frequency and PID commands by using AN and Q keys on the keypad It is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed motor speed etc by setting function code E48 E Setting up a frequency command Using Q and Q keys Factory default 1 Set function code F01 to 0 Q keys on keypad This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the AN Q key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit will blink 3 If you need to change the frequency command press the WIO key again The new setting will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory and retained even when the power is off When the power is turned ON next time the setting will be used as an initial reference frequency Tip e If you have set function code F01 to 0 Gig keys on keypad but have selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 i e frequency command 2 frequ
145. d protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of power lines Use the devices within the recommended current range Use wires in the specified size When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output Secondary circuit Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur A WARNING e Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W Do not insert a braking resistor between terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident Generally control signal wires are not reinforced in
146. d sources specified by H30 Mode selection Data for H30 Frequency command Run command 0 Inverter itself FO01 C30 Inverter itself F02 1 Via RS 485 communications link inverter itself F02 standard 2 inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link standard 3 Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link standard standard 4 Via RS 485 communications link inverter itself F02 option card Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link 5 option card standard 6 inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link T7 i standard option card Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card option card Command sources specified by y98 Run command Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Data for y98 Frequency command 0 Follow H30 data 1 Via field bus option 2 Follow H30 data 3 Via field bus option Via field bus option Combination of command sources Frequency command Via RS 485 Via RS 485 Inverter itself communications communications link Standard link option card Via field bus option l H30 1 H30 0 1 or 4 Inverter itself aati y98 0 y98 1 VAR oe H30 2 3 or 5 communications link standard y98 1 Via RS 485 communications link option card H30 6 7 or 8 y98 1 Run command source Via field
147. de allows you to set up function codes for making the inverter functions match your needs To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 3 15 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary The menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking is as same as its of Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code Tip E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 12 Figure 3 4 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Power ON i List of monitoring items Running status info gt i
148. digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 F01 C30 Frequency Command 1 and 2 F01 or C30 sets the source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively F01 C30 0 Enable A Q keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 1 Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC 5 18 Data for F01 C30 2 11 12 Function Enable the current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP command data 17 and DOWN command data 18 should be assigned to the digital input terminals X1 to X5 Enable the digital input of the binary coded decimal BCD code or binary data entered via the digital I O interface option For details refer to the Digital I O Interface Option Instruction Manual Enable the pulse train entered via t
149. ds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10 4 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and enclosure electrically and ground the motor and enclosure MCCB or Metal Enclosure RCD ELCB Se FRENIC Multi L1 R L1 L U EMC O compliant filter optional Three or single Jo Foo TN Pg O phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 10 4 Installing the Inverter with an External EMC compliant Filter Optional into a Metal Enclosure 10 4 10 3 3 Leakage current from EMC filter built in type inverters or inverters with an external EMC complaint filter optional Table 10 1 Leakage Current from EMC Filter Built in Type Inverter Leakage current mA 2 Input power Inverter type 1 Normal Worst 3 FRNO 1E1E 20 5 a meat 130 20 0 i ny FRN15E1E 20 7 T 400 V FRN4 0E1E 4E a Pa F FRN15E1E 40 N 7 Single phase 200 V a FRN2 2E1E 70 1 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination 2 The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three phase 240 V 50 Hz three phase 400 V 50 Hz and single phase 230 V 50 Hz 3 The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line 10 5 Table 10 2 Leakage Current from Inverters with an External EMC complaint Filter Optional Leakage current mA 2
150. e failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state 4 Enable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Restart at the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power frequency at which the failure the inverter saves the output frequency being power failure occurred applied at that time and shuts down the output so that for general loads the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved during the last power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure 5 Enable restart After a momentary power failure restoring power and Restart at the starting then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the frequency for starting frequency specified by function code F23 low inertia load This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state up
151. e software hardware RS 485 converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware Broken communications cable or poor contact A communications error occurred during RS 485 communications What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 y11 to y20 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or make the no response error detection time be ignored y08 y18 0 Check the host equipment gt Remove the cause of the equipment error Check the RS 485 converter e g check for poor contact Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware such as recommended devices as appropriate Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable 6 21 Possible Causes 6 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter 7 The RS 485 communications card malfunctioned What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control gt Improve noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 relay converter with a recommended insulated converter gt Replace the RS 485 communications card o
152. e 2 6 Recommended Ferrule Terminals Type Screw size With insulated collar Without insulated collar AWG24 0 25 mm Al0 25 6BU AWG22 0 34 mm Al0 34 6TQ A0 34 7 Dimension of openings in the control 3 5 AWG20 0 5 mm Al0 5 6WH A0 5 6 a ee AWG 16 1 25 mm Al1 5 6BK A1 5 7 Screwdriver head style 2 9 2 3 3 Recommended wire sizes Table 2 7 lists the recommended wire sizes The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using HIV single wire for 75 C at an ambient temperature of 50 C Table 2 7 Recommended Wire Sizes Recommended wire size mm 1 Main circuits Main circuit Nominal power input applied Inverter type L1 R L2 S L3 T Braking Control motor L1 L L2 N i a circuit Power supply voltage w DCR w o DCR FRNO 1E1 20 3 7 5 5 75 i 15 FRN15E1 20 0 75 1 5 2 2 4 0 2 FRN4 0E1 4E 5 5 7 5 11 15 FRN15E1 40 0 2 0 4 FRNO 75E1 8 70 FRN1 5E1m 70 FRN2 2E1 70 gt N co n pa o D cC e Three phase 400 V Three phase 200 V DCR DC reactor 1 Use the terminal crimp with an insulation sheath or with processing by the insulation tube Use the insulated wire of 75 C 600 V HIV insulated This selection assumes the inverter is used in ambient temperature at 50 C 2 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E
153. e J01 to 3 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with WN and Q keys are different from those under the regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 the item accessible is the primary frequency command if it is set to any other data it is the PID dancer position command Lo Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 for the details of the PID control Setting the PID dancer position command with the AN and Q keys 1 2 Set function code J02 to 0 AN Q keys on keypad Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID command with the Q Q key To enable the PID dancer position command to be modified with the Q I Q key first switch to Running mode Press the Gig key to display the PID dancer position command The lowest digit of the displayed command and its decimal point blink To change the command press the AN Q key again The command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory as function code J57 data It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the via keypad PID command Furthermore you can directly configure the command with function code J57 Even if multi frequency is
154. e Program function code data monitor I O signal Reset key RUN key states maintenance information and RUN LED alarm information Function Data key al UP key DOWN key Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions LED Monitor Item Keys and LED Indicators Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes LED Pann m In Running mode Running status information e g output Monitor ou LI frequency current and voltage E In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data E In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode E In Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode E n Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as follows E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the Operation inverter output frequency Hz output current Keys A output voltage V etc E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the data entered with N and V keys E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the pro
155. e generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 14 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 when you assign the terminal C1 to C1 function Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded wire lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt n aey Capacitor analog output 0 022 uF 13 50V 12 11 1 Ferrite core 1kto5kQ Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite eee Figure 2 13 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 14 Example of Electric Noise Reduction X1 Digital 1 Various signals such as coast to stop alarm from external equipment input 1 and multi frequency commands can be assigned to terminals X1 to i eo X5 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E05 E98 and X2 Digital E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function input 2 Codes X3 Digital 2 Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the internal slide input 3 switch Refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X5 X4 Digital FWD or REV If the logic value for
156. ecified by E35 Current detection Timer or E38 Current detection 2 Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals independently if necessary Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but also for the operation level of the current detection D Refer to the description of E34 Note m Switched to motor 2 SWM2 Function code data 49 This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2 M1 terminal command assigned to a digital input terminal For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Function code data 12 5 51 E Brake signal BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Refer to the descriptions of J68 through J72 E Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode E29 Frequency Arrival Delay Time for FAR2 E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width for FAR and FAR2 The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by Reference frequency Hysteresis width specified by E30 the Frequency arrival signal FAR comes ON After the delay time specified by E29 the
157. ecifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the motor If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output CNote any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting __ l p Stop I l frequency 1 1 frequency 1 F23 Time Inverter Out of running Out of running running state Gate OFF MUNIN one ON Gate OFF Time F26 F27 Motor Sound Carrier frequency and tone E Motor sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output Secondary wirings Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz Motor sound noise emission High lt gt Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High lt gt Low Ripples in output current waveform Large lt gt Small Leakage current Low lt High Electromagnetic noise emission Low lt gt High Inverter loss Low lt High 5 34 Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a
158. ecommended ones within the related current range Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise fire could occur Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output circuit Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to connect the grounding wire for the inverters grounding terminal amp G Otherwise electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 8 shows the main circuit power terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Main Circuit Power Terminals Symbol Name Functions L1 R L2 S L3 T Main circuit power Connect the three phase input power lines or single phase or L1 L L2 N inputs input power lines
159. ection 6 4 while no alarm code is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 No power supplied to Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage the inverter unbalance gt Tun ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 No forward reverse Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu operation command was 4 I O Checking using the keypad inputted or both the commands were gt Input a run command inputted simultaneously gt Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both external signal commands are being inputted operation gt Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV to function codes E98 and E99 gt Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly Make sure that the sink source slide switch on the interface printed circuit board interface PCB is properly configured se No indication of rotation Check t
160. ed any of the following operations has been performed Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 Turn the run command OFF before resetting the alarm Turning ON the forced stop digital input STOP decelerated the inverter to stop according to the specified deceleration period H96 gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E05 on terminals X1 through X5 What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter Check whether the data of function codes agrees with the specifications of the motor Motor 1 F04 F05 H50 through H53 P02 and P03 Motor 2 A02 A03 A16 and A17 Check whether the connection length between the inverter and the motor is not exceeding 50 m gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the connection wire length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 6 20 Possible Causes 4 5 The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor 6 A tuning operation involving moto
161. ely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm 1 When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load Note A CAUTION When the instantaneous overcurrent limiting is enabled the motor output torque could drop For driving elevating machinery which could cause a serious problem with a drop of the motor output torque therefore disable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting Note that disabling it will cause an overcurrent trip when a current exceeding the inverter protection level flows so secure the protective coordination using a mechanical brake An accident could occur 5 67 H28 Droop Control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery any speed gap between inverter driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors The droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its load eliminating such kind of load unbalance Speed Output frequency Reference frequency aa Output frequency Droop characteristics asm Garni ola gt Load 100 Motor load torque Note To use droop control be sure to auto tune the inverter for the motor H30 Communications
162. emory even while the inverter is powered off and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered ON p e Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID process command SS4 or SS8 ON you p still can set the process command using the keypad e When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the Gig key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID process command currently selected while you cannot change the setting e On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID process command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed li a Decimal point Table 3 4 PID process Command Manually Set with Q Q Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote LED monitor selection command SV E43 J01 J02 Multi frequency SS4 SS8 With W O key PID process command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF PID process command currently Other than 0 selected 3 7 Setting up the frequency command with Q and Q keys under PID process control When function code F01 is set to 0 WD Q keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a manual speed command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link or multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in
163. ence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs Inverter capacity kW Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds 0 1 to 7 5 11 to 15 1 0 5 30 E Restart after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the selected deceleration time 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in the cu
164. ency command via communication or multi frequency command then the AN and Q keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency e When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the Q Q key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the AN Q key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit e After the least significant digit blinks by pressing the WO key holding down the key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits e By setting function code C30 to 0 Gig keys on keypad and selecting frequency command 2 you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner using the AN Q key You can set a reference frequency not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items motor speed load shaft speed line speed and constant feeding rate time depending on the setting of function code E48 3 4 5 or 6 as listed in Table 3 3 3 6 E Settings under PID process control To enable the
165. ending on the shipping destination Note 3 Inverter types marked with v in the table above are compliant with the EN61000 3 2 A14 so they may be connected to public low voltage power supply unconditionally Conditions apply when connecting models marked with If you want to connect them to public low voltage power supply you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier In general you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter To obtain the data consult your Fuji Electric representative 10 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 10 5 1 General General purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric states that all our inverters with CE or T V mark are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 10 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC Multi series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If you want to use the FRENIC Multi series of inverters in systems equipment in the EU refer to the guidelines on page vi 10 8 High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi Instruction manual First Edition March 2006 Fourth Edition April 2011 Fuji Electric Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any er
166. enu 4 I O Checking 3 19 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information E EER eth EE TEA 3 23 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information 3 25 3 0 Alarm Mode a 3 27 XV Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to POWETINg OM a5 tonto he Se 4 1 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking 4 1 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 4 2 lt Tuning procedure gt cccccceeeeeeees 4 2 E Errors during tuning 4 4 AYA TeSt rUih ccceccccecceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 4 4 2 OPCAUOMN s dcc3cto cdot nee tant caer 4 5 4 2 1 Jogging Operation c ee 4 5 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES ee 5 1 5 1 Function Code Tables ee 5 1 5 2 Overview of Function Codes 5 18 Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor cxiet ioitalntniteotieatoststadentsticils keke 6 2 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 6 2 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 6 8 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED MONITO T a reaa ee ance tae EA 6 10 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Codeis Displayed srei ate 6 24 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1
167. equency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Function code data 21 This output signal comes ON when a difference between the output frequency before the torque limiting and the reference frequency comes to within the frequency arrival hysteresis width E30 and then the frequency arrival delay time E29 has elapsed Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 5 50 E Inverter output limiting with delay JOL2 Function code data 22 If the inverter enters any output limiting operation such as output torque limiting output current limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload stop hit and stop it automatically activates the stall free facility and shifts the output frequency When such an output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more this output signal comes ON This signal is used for lessening the load or alerting the user to an overload status with the monitor m Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take TILI I a corrective action before an overheat trip 77 actually happens This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip LiH TILI I temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip Lsm i temperature minus 8 C E Service lifetime alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it i
168. er and the main circuit terminal block COVE 232 0 a ed 2 4 2 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications ee 2 7 2 3 3 Recommended wire sizes 2 10 2 3 4 Wiring precautions 2 11 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals e 2 11 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 16 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 2 23 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 25 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for COMMECUOM cu saasdeten hone 2 25 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps 2 26 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 005 2 28 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators n the Keypad rieni 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes 3 2 3 3 Running Mode seese 3 4 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status 3 4 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID c mMmmaNd Siis t e e a 3 6 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor 3 11 3 4 Programming Mode 3 11 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup 3 13 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting 3 15 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking 3 16 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 3 16 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status M
169. erminals X1 to X5 as listed below Terminal X2 Function 1000 Select multi frequency SS1 y on y 14 Terminal X3 Function 1 1001 Select multi frequency SS2 y n y 2 Terminal X4 Function 1002 Select multi frequency SS4 y n y 7 Terminal X5 Function 1003 Select multi frequency SS8 y n y 8 1004 Select ACC DEC time RT1 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 1007 Coast to a stop BX 1008 Reset alam RST 1009 Enable extemal alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 UP Increase output frequency UP DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN Enable data change with keypad WE KP Cancel PID control Hz PID Switch normal inverse operation IVS Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus Universal DI U DI 26 Enable auto search for idling motor ST speed at starting 27 Switch to speed feedback control PG Hz 6 30 Force to stop STOP 33 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components 34 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 42 Activate the limit switch at start point LS 6 43 Start reset S R 6 44 Switch to the serial pulse receiving SPRM 6 mode 45 Enter the return mode RTN 6 46 Enable overload stop OLS 6 Setting the
170. erters to power lines with the exception of industrial low voltage power lines Refer to Figure 10 5 below for details Medium voltage Transformer User C from medium voltage to low C gt voltage Public low voltage Transformer from lt Power supply medium voltage to low voltage User B s Industrial low voltage Inverter 1kW or less Inverter power supply 1kW or less The inverter connected here is regulated by the harmonics regulations If the harmonics flowing to the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed The inverter connected here is not regulated Figure 10 5 Power Source and Regulation 10 7 10 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation Table 10 3 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation PONGTSURPIY Inverter type w o DC reactor w DC reactor ADpICAIS voltage DC reactor type FRNO 1E1m 20 T E Three phase FRNO 2E10 2 0 Mi Three phase _FERNO4E1W AL 400V FRNO 75E1m 40 O y DCRo75 FRNO 1E1m 700 Single phase FRNO 2E1 70 200 V FRNO 4E1 70 FRNO 75E1 70 When supplying three phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three phase 400 VAC power line using a transformer the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K dep
171. ese function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally 5 31 F18 Bias Frequency command 1 C50 Bias for Frequency 1 Bias base point C32 C34 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain Gain base point C37 C39 Analog Input Adjustment C1 Gain Gain base point C42 C44 Analog Input Adjustment V2 Gain Gain base point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 C1 function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 e The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value Note F18 e Specifying that the data of the
172. f the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal starting sequence e Ifthe Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency 5 29 During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 Power failure Recovery F14 4 DC link bus Undervoltage voltage erat Searching for motor speed Output frequency Motor speed Acceleration Auto restarting after momentary power failure Time E Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be res
173. fer to Chapter 8 Section 8 4 2 Standard keypad To mount the keypad on the panel fix it firmly using a pair of M3 screws put through the taps shown below Figure 2 27 Tightening torque 0 7 N m Panel wall Keypad fixing screws Figure 2 27 Mounting a Keypad on the Panel Wall Connect an extension cable CB 5S CB 3S or CB 1S or off the shelf straight LAN cable to RJ 45 connectors Modular jacks on the keypad and inverter standard RS 485 port Refer to Figure 2 28 Penel wall RJ 45 connector Modular jack Keypad RJ 45 connector To RJ 45 connector were on inverter Remote operation extension cable CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S or LAN cable Figure 2 28 Connecting a Keypad and an Inverter s Standard RS 485 port Do not connect the inverter to a PC s LAN port Ethernet hub or telephone line doing so Note may damage the inverter or the equipment on the other end m Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Follow the step 6 in Mounting a keypad on the panel wall 2 27 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 1 Harmonic component Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component which may affect other loads and power factor correcting capacitors that are connected to the same power supply as the inverter If the harmonic component causes any problems connect a DC reactor option to the inverter It may also be neces
174. fies Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspection by the following items of the list of periodic inspection in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspection be sure to stop the motor turn OFF the inverter and shut down power supply Then remove the covers of the control and main circuit terminal blocks Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check item Environment 1 Check the ambient temperature humidity vibration and atmosphere dust gas oil mist or water drops 2 Check if tools or other foreign materials or dangerous objects are left around the equipment Voltage Check if the voltages of the main and control circuit are correct 7 1 How to inspect 1 Check visually or measure using apparatus 2 Visual inspection Measure the voltages using a multimeter or the like Evaluation criteria 1 The standard specification must be satisfied 2 No foreign or dangerous objects are left The standard specification must be satisfied Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Keypad 1 Check if the display is clear 1 2 1 2 2 Check if there is missing parts in Visual inspecti
175. for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 30 C This is to prevent the electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deteriorating 2 The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture Include a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70 3 Ifthe inverter has been installed in the equipment or control panel at a construction site where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable environment specified in Table 1 1 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverter to a motor or run the motor 1 3 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Item Specifications Site location Indoors Ambient 10 to 50 C Note 1 temperature Relative 5 to 95 No condensation
176. g of function code data Note 2 Theo codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option E Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only two menus Menu 0 Quick Setup and Menu 1 Data Setting allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 10 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E52 Menus selectable M m k t te Function code data editing mode factory default Mead i sae eae 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 Data Checking Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 Pressing the A Q key will cycle through the menu With the key you can select the Tip desired menu item Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display will return to the first menu item 3 12 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of
177. g time H95 DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking Braking starting frequency F20 F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state E Braking level F21 F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 E Braking time F22 F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking E Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode Data for H95 Characteristics Note 0 Slow response Slows the rising edge of Insufficient braking torque may the current thereby preventing reverse result at the start of DC braking rotation at the start of DC braking 1 Quick response Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result edge of the current thereby accelerating depending on the m
178. g wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise electric shock may occur 2 Check for short circuits between terminals and exposed live parts and ground faults 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws 4 Check if the motor is separated from mechanical equipment 5 Turn the switches OFF so that the inverter does not start or operate erroneously at power on 6 Check if safety measures are taken against Supply E g Wire connection for three phase runaway of the system e g a defense to protect een people from unexpectedly approaching your power Figure 4 1 Connection of Main Circuit system Terminals Inverter G WR Las L3T U 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking e Be sure to install the terminal cover if any before turning the power ON Do not remove any cover while powering on e Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points This is a case when no function code data is changed from the factory setting PRG MODE a sine A 1 Check if the LED monitor displays 7 77 means that La the frequency command is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 2 VW If the LED monitor displays numbers except Lii press A Q keys to set i i1 as the frequency command 2 Check if a built in cooling fan rotates For the inverter of 0 75 kW or below no cooling fan is mounted Figure 4
179. ge Inverter type FRN11E1S 20 FRN15E1S 20 FRN11E1S 40 FRN55E1S 40 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V 8 5 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type 80 4x5x6 Elongated hole oO NI oO EMC flange Which comes with the inverter as standard Main nameplate i Ciamp for shielded motor cable lamp for shielded control cable Power en soi Inverter type eens Eag voltage D D1 FRNO 1E1E 20 vi FRNO 2E1E 20 102 FRNO 4E1E 20 127 FRNO 75E1E 20 152 Singie LERNO 1E1E 70 Phase FRNO 2E1E 70 102 W 200V FRNO 4E1E 70 127 ions mm D2 D3 10 21 2 25 36 2 50 61 2 10 21 2 25 36 2 the shiPPing destination Note A box O in the above table rePlaces A C E J or K depending on For tnree Phase 200 V class series of inverters it rePiaces A C J or K 110 6 5 97 6 5 D DI D2 oO lae oO EMC flange Which comes with the inverter as standard lamp for shielded motor cable lamp for shielded control cable FRNO 4E1E
180. gh starting torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V Rated volt 100 Rate Vola 100 Aa ei ee Torque Output Torque Output boost l frequency boost lo iy frequency Pe Base Hz requency frequency 1 F04 F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 Linear V f pattern F37 1 5 23 Tj When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage p i a may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some characteristics of the motor itself and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f pattern Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Variable torque output Non linear not using non linear V f pattern V f pattern 1 J Voltage H51 4 Output frequency Non linear V f pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 E Torque boost e Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the m
181. gnal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for the control signal Check whether the frequency command has not failed because of noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 6 5 Possible Causes 3 Frequency switching or multi frequency command was enabled 4 The connection between the inverter and the motor was too long 5 The inverter output is hunting due to vibration caused by low stiffness of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt If the relay has a contact problem replace the relay Check whether auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is enabled gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used gt Enable load selection for higher startup torque F37 A13 1 and check for any vibration gt Make the output wire as short as possible Once cancel all the automatic control systems auto torque boost auto energy saving operation overload prevention control current limiter torque limiter regenerative energy s
182. he PG interface card option For details refer to the PG Interface Card Instruction Manual To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 set function code C35 to 0 Setting C35 to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V Terminal C1 can be used for current input C1 function or voltage input V2 function depending upon the settings of switch SW7 on the interface PCB and function code E59 In addition to the frequency command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link and multi frequency are provided Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz7 assigned to one of the digital input terminals Crip switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Refer to function codes E01 to E05 5 19 FO2 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor Data for F02 Run Command Source Description 0 Keypad Enables the fuy 610 keys to run and stop the motor Rotation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by specified by terminal terminal command FWD or REV command 1 External signal Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run and stop the motor 2 Keypad Enables keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the forward Forward rotation rotation There is no need to specify the rotation d
183. he following tables 200 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0J K Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load kW applied current current motor A A kW PO2 A16 P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 P08 A22 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 44 0 40 13 79 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 68 0 55 12 96 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 30 1 06 12 95 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 30 1 66 10 20 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 60 2 30 8 67 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 6 10 3 01 6 55 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 9 20 4 85 6 48 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 15 0 7 67 5 79 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 22 5 11 0 5 28 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 29 0 12 5 4 50 11 00 to 14 99 11 42 0 17 7 3 78 15 00 to 18 49 15 55 0 20 0 3 25 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 67 0 21 4 2 92 22 00 to 30 00 22 78 0 25 1 2 70 400 V class series Example for FRN_ _ _E10 0J K Motor capacity Nominal Rated Nodoad R kW applied current current motor A A P02 A16 ny P03 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 50 to 2 19 15 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 11 00 to 14 99 11 15 00 to 18 49 15 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 22 00 to 30 00 22 5 62 P12 A26 Rated slip frequency Hz 1 77 1 77 2 33 2 40 2 33 2 00 1 80 1 93 1 40 1 57 1 07 1 13 0 87 0 90 Rated slip frequency Hz P12 A26 HO4 HO5 Auto reset Times and Reset interval H04 and HO5 specify the auto reset function that makes the inverter automati
184. he input status of the forward reverse rotation direction direction keypad command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad operation gt Input the rotation direction F02 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 4 The inverter could not Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad accept any run eammandsironr ihe gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run keypad since it was in command Programming mode 5 Arun command with While referring to the block diagram of the drive command block higher priority than the check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data one attempted was Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad th ee sapped Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command 6 The frequency Check that a frequency command has been entered with Menu 4 command was set below I O Checking using the keypad the starting or stop frequency gt Set the value of the frequency command to the same or higher than that of the starting or stop frequency F23 or F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to lower values gt Inspect the frequency command signal converters switches or relay contacts Replace any one
185. he inverter Equivalent to the motor Maximum frequency F03 A01 synchronous speed Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 A01 Output current RMS of the inverter Twice the inverter rated current Output voltage RMS of the 250 V for 200 V class series inverter 500 V for 400 V class series Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Load factor Equivalent to the indication of Twice the rated motor load the load meter Twice the rated output of the Input power of the inverter verer Feedback amount under PID control 100 of the feedback amount Feedback value of closed loop Maximum speed ego 100 of the feedback value DC link bus voltage of the 500 V for 200 V class series inverter 1000 V for 400 V class series Command via communications Communication User s Manual MEH448b Motor output kW Twice the rated motor output Full scale output of the meter This always outputs the full scale calibration 100 ieee a naan 100 of the feedback amount Output level of the PID controller under PID control Maximum frequency F03 A01 Frequency command lf F31 16 PID output JO1 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio compensation enabled the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of
186. he inverter enters the tripped state it issues a reset command to auto reset the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below lt Timing scheme for failed retry No of reset times 3 gt Alarm factor Protective function l I l I Tripped state Reset command Inverter output frequency Auto reset signal TRY Alarm output for any alarm 0 Time The reset operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter s digital output terminal Y1 Y2 or 30A B C to which the TRY is assigned by setting 26 with function code E20 E21 or E27 5 63 HOG Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life the cooling fan is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF 0 Disable Always in operation 1 Enable ON OFF controllable HO7 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern HO7 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns patterns to control output frequency Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an im
187. he load or check whether there is resonance with the panel or likes gt Disconnect the motor and run it without the inverter and determine where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency Hysteresis width so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance 6 6 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time Possible Causes 1 The inverter ran the motor by S curve or curvilinear pattern 2 The current limiting prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration The automatic regenerative braking was active during deceleration 4 Overload Se 5 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 6 An external frequency command is being used 7 In torque limit operation the acceleration deceleration is suppressed 8 Any acceleration deceleration time is invalidly set What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code HO7 Acceleration deceleration pattern gt Select the linear pattern HO7 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter Level
188. he motor at 16 different preset frequencies The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 In the Selected frequency column Other than multi frequency represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others For details refer to the block diagram in FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block SS4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON SS2 4 S FF O TI T O F E a O a OFF O T T OFF OFF OFF O FF F F O 7 OFF O T O T O Z E Select ACC DEC time RT1 Function code data 4 Selected frequency Other than multi frequency C05 Multi frequency 1 C06 Multi frequency 2 C07 Multi frequency 3 C08 Multi frequency 4 C09 Multi frequency 5 C10 Multi frequency 6 C11 Multi frequency 7 C12 Multi frequency 8 C13 Multi frequency 9 C14 Multi frequency 10 C15 Multi frequency 11 C16 Multi frequency 12 C17 Multi frequency 13 C18 Multi frequency 14 C19 Multi frequency 15 x xw xw x x This terminal command switches between ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 and ACC DEC time 2 E10 E11 If no RT1 command is assigned ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 takes effect by default Input terminal command RT1 OFF ON Acceleration deceleration time Acce
189. he power control circuit breaker board and inverter s main terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase input MCCB power supply L1 L and L2 N for single phase input power supply from overload or short circuit which in turn prevents secondary disasters caused by Residual current the inverter malfunctioning operated RCDs ELCBs function in the same way as MCCBs Use the MCCBs and protective device RCDs ELCBs that satisfy the recommended rated current listed below RCD Earth leakage Input Nominal Rated current of circuit breaker power applied motor Inverter type MCCB and ELCB A ELCB 1 Supply w DCR FRN0 1E1m 20 1with FRN0 2E1m 20 overcurrent FRN0 4E1m 20 protection l FRNO 75E1 20 Three FRN1 5E1 20 phase FRN2 2E1 20 200 V FRN3 7E1 20 FRN5 5E1 20 FRN7 5E1 20 FRN11E1m 20 FRN15E1m 20 FRN0 4E1m 40 FRN0 75E1m 40 FRN1 5E1m 40 FRN2 2E1m 40 FRN3 7E1m 40 FRN4 0E1m 4E FRN5 5E1m 40 FRN7 5E1m 40 FRN11E1m 40 FRN15E1m 40 FRN0 1E1m 7 0O FRN0 2E1m 7 0O FRN0 4E1m 7 0O FRN0 75E1m 70 FRN1 5E1 70 FRN2 2E1 70 2 The FRN4 0E1S 4E is for the EU Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Select the MCCB or RCD ELCB with appropriate breaking capacity according to the power suppl
190. he surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature insulation that withstands the surge voltage Connect an output circuit filter option to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less Wiring length for EMC filter built in type e When the wiring length between the inverter and motor exceeds 10 m the filter circuit may be overheated and damaged due to increase of leakage current To reduce the leakage current set the motor sound carrier frequency to 2 kHz or below with function code F26 Note DC reactor terminals P1 and P 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect a DC reactor option to terminals P1 and P Cote e The wiring length should be 10 m or below Tg Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor DCR is not going to be used e If a converter is connected you do not need to connect a DC reactor DCR AWARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur DC braking resistor terminals P and DB 1 Connect a DC braking resistor option to terminals P and DB 2 When using an external braking resistor arrange the inverter and braking resistor to keep the wiring length to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel A WARNING Never in
191. hen the inverter is connected to a communications network via the RS 485 port designed for the keypad detecting a communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code 4 4 If the data could not be saved during activation of the undervoltage protection function the inverter displays the alarm code When the inverter is connected to a communications network via an optional RS 485 communications card detecting a communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code E P When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart You can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop and reset Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command because of a broken wire etc this function issues an alarm and continues the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection LED Alarm monitor output displays 30A B C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Not applicable LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 80A B C Protection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 against ms this function stops the inverter output momentary If rest
192. humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gas oil mist vapor or water drops Note 2 The atmosphere can contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa pressure Vibration 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m s 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz 2 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base The temperature of the heat sink will rise up to approx 90 C during operation of the inverter so the inverter should be mounted on a base made of material that can withstand temperatures of this level A WARNING Install the inverter on a base constructed from metal or other non flammable material A fire may result with other material 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 are maintained at all times When installing the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the temperature around the inverter will tend to increase Do not install the inverter in a small panel with poor ventilation 2 1 Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Output current alutuce derating factor 1000 m or lower 1 00 1000 to 1500 m 0 97
193. ime i I I l mnene a ef presumed Auto search for idling motor speed to follow 5 65 E H09 and STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting The combination of HO9 data and the STM state determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below Auto search for idling motor speed at starting Data for H09 For restart after momentary eae nomal stra power failure F14 4 or 5 P 0 Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL OO0O0 2 and 4 in the secondary lines it cannot perform auto search Use the filter OFL OOO OA instead Note E Auto search delay time H49 Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for residual voltage to disappear H49 specifies that time 0 0 to 10 0 sec At the startup triggered by a run command ON auto search starts with the delay specified by H49 When two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately coast to stop it and perform auto search every switching H49 can eliminate the need of the run command timing control The H49 data should be the same value as the H13 data Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time At the restart after a momentary power failure at the start by turning the terminal comma
194. in power supply without fail during measurement 2 If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the control wiring 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common cable as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground 5 5MQ 1 MQ for the EMC filter built in type of inverters or a larger value displayed at the Megger indicates a correct state The value is for a discrete inverter Inverter LR L2 S L3 T DB P1 P N U Figure 7 2 Megger Test 2 Dielectric strength test of control circuit Do not perform a Megger test or dielectric strength test for the control circuit Prepare a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground One MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Dielectric strength test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the inverter terminals so that the test voltage is not applied 7 8 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information 1 Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section
195. in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 2 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Shipping Destination on page 5 14 7 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0800 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 5 10 A codes continued Data Default Refer to copying Incre Code Name Data setting range ment setting page Cc l A05 Torque Boost 2 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 Note This setting takes effect when A13 0 1 3 or 4 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan for Motor 2 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with gt a Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan Overload detection level 0 00 D
196. inate any noise emitted from these inverters FRENIC Multi inverters categorized as Category C3 of the EN61800 3 are not designed for use in a domestic environment These inverters may interfere with the operations of home appliances or office equipment due to noise emitted from them 10 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 10 3 1 General The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer For this reason Fuji s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer Generally machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well Manufacturers therefore shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above use a Fuji FRENIC inverter in connection with an EMC compliant filter optional feature in accordance with the instructions contained in this instruction manual Installing the inverter s in a metal enclosure may be necessary depending upon the operating environment of the equipment that the inverter is to be used with Tip Our EMC compliance test is performed under the follo
197. ing a keypad on the panel wall Refer to Figure 2 23 m Installing a Keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Refer to Figure 2 24 Remote operation extension cable Keypad Inverter fixing screw Figure 2 23 Mounting Keypad on the Panel Wall Keypad Remote operation extension cable Inverter Figure 2 24 Installing Keypad at a Remote Site e g for Operation on Hand 2 25 2 Parts needed for connection To mount install a keypad on a place other than an inverter parts listed below are needed Parts name Model Remarks Extension cable Note CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 cables available in length of 5m 3m and 1m Fixing screw ea Keypad rear cover Accessories Note When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant to US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer SANWA Supply Co LTD Model KB 10T5 01K 1m KB STP 01K 1m Shielded LAN cable compliant to EMC Directive 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps m Mounting a keypad on the panel wall Pull the keypad toward you while holding down the hooks on the keypad Figure 2 25 Removing a Keypad Fix the keypad rear cover to the keypad Keypad rear cover Keypad Figure 2 26 Fixing the Keypad Rear Cover for Remote Keypad Operation 2 26 Make a cut out on the panel wall For details re
198. ing as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 2 19 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit 2 21 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Name Functions Classifi cation 30A B Alarm 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been relay activated to stop the motor output Contact rating for any 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A error 2 Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 and Y2 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output 3 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Between terminals 30A and 30C is closed excited for ON signal output Active ON or Between terminals 30A and 30C is open non excited for ON signal output Active OFF Relay output Standard 1 Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter supplies RJ 45 the power to the keypad through the pins specified below The connector extension cable for remote operation also uses wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power 2 Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller Refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches for setting of the terminating resistor 4 5 VDC Communication 8 Vcc RJ 45 connect
199. ing or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference frequency using A Q keys Check the above points again If any problem is found modify the function code data again as described below 4 2 Operation After confirming that the inverter normally drives the motor in a test run make mechanical connections connections to the machine system and electrical connections wiring and cabling and configure the necessary function codes properly before starting a production run Note Depending on the production run conditions further adjustments can be required such as adjustments of torque boost F09 A05 acceleration time F07 E10 and deceleration time F08 E11 4 2 1 Jogging Operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display Liot e Enter Running mode see page 3 3 e Press the A keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to _ again e Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration Tip deceleration time respectively Use these function codes exclusively for the jogging operation with your needs e Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation st
200. input stops the inverter output for motor LIIT Yes thermistor protection Motor protection Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals C1 and 11 and set the function codes and slide switch on the interface PCB accordingly Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the early inverter is stopped by the electronic thermal overload warning protection for the motor Stall prevention Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter Yes output issues an alarm and stops the inverter output for any fault lt Alarmitreset s The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed Memory error The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the a Yes detection data is written If a memory error is detected the inverter stops Keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communications error Ere Yes communications between the inverter and the keypad during operation using error detection the standard keypad or the multi function keypad optional CPU error If the inverter detects a CPU error or LSI e
201. ion of the function codes Make a note of function code data currently configured and initialize all function code data H03 gt After initialization reconfigure the necessary function codes one by one checking the running status of the inverter 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter 2 The power for the control PCB did not reach a high enough level What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Connect a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is poor contact between the jumper bar and the terminals gt Connect the jumper bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and P or retighten the screws 6 8 Possible Causes 3 The keypad was not properly connected to the inverter Check and Measures Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter gt Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the pr
202. ircuit tester or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF E Setting up the slide switches Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB and interface PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2 22 To access the slide switches remove the terminal cover and keypad LL For details on how to remove the terminal cover refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing the terminal cover and main circuit terminal block cover Table 2 10 lists function of each slide switch Table 2 10 Function of Each Slide Switch Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE To make the digital input terminal X1 to X5 FWD or REV serve as a current sink turn SW1 to the SINK position To make them serve as a current source turn SW1 to the SOURCE position Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter on and off To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device
203. irect contact power lines or nodes be sure to install type B of RCD ELCB on the input primary of the inverter if the power supply is three phase 200 400 V For single phase 200 V power supply use type A When you use no RCD ELCB take any other protective measure that isolates the electric equipment from other equipment on the same power supply line using double or reinforced insulation or that isolates the power supply lines connected to the electric equipment using an isolation transformer The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4 install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher Install the inverter AC or DC reactor input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment To make an inverter with no integrated EMC filter conform to the EMC directive it is necessary to connect an external EMC filter to the inverter and install them properly so that the entire equipment including the inverter conforms to the EMC directive Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to connect them To connect the three phase or single phase 200 V class series of inverters to the power
204. irection 3 Keypad Enables keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the reverse Reverse rotation Faton There is no need to specify the rotation direction When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse REV CNote terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively e When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed e When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate e In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link are provided For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual FO3 Maximum Frequency 1 F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit a reference frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the A WARNING The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur Tip Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a frequency limiter high 5 20 F04 Base Frequency 1 F05 Rated
205. is kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt X1 to X5 FWD REV Photocoupler CM 24 VDC X1 to X5 HHH FWD REV Photocoupler a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 16 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact Ti E Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 p FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 17 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power supply which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC J Q is 4 D Q Programmable oj Programmable ea lt gt K logic controller X Control circuit K logic c
206. isable 0 01 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the a 1 o o lt oa lt N motor Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 DC Braking 2 0 0 to 60 0 Braking starting frequency Braking level 0 to 100 1 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 0 01 to 30 00 A12 0 1 Hz A13 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load Auto Torque Boost 1 Constant torque load fo min Hz ojo aa Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC A14 Control Mode Selection 2 V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface A15 No of poles 2 to 22 A16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 0 01 kw 0 01 HP lt N a A17 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 2 o a Rated value of Fuji standard motor A18 Auto tuning 0 Disable 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 00 to 50 00
207. it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base CNote frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through PO3 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 e When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 O or 1 E Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this feature to your power system This feature applies to constant speed operation only During acceleration deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or auto torque boost depending on the F37 data If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration deceleration e Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the note base frequen
208. itors for power factor correction in the inverter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to correct the inverter power factor Do not use power capacitors for power factor correction in the inverter s output secondary circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC Directive If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under a light load it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open close of the power capacitor for power factor correction in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in Chapter 7 Section 7 5 Insulation Test When using remote control limit the wiring length between the inverter and operator panel to 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded wire If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor the inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent high frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance in the wires connected to the phases Ensure that the wiring is shorter than 50 m If this length must be exceeded lower the carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter OFL Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the cu
209. kQ impedance Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 Pulse signal is output You can select FMP function with the slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ Pulse duty Approx 50 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 p s Voltage waveform e Pulse output waveform toa ymax e FM output circuit 15 V Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY Do not connect a meter with pull up resistor to the input primary side 2 20 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Name Functions cation n Classifi Y1 Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and output 1 overload early warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 and Y2 by setting function code E20 and E21 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Y2 Transistor Overview of Function Codes for details omputz 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 Y2 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 Y2 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor output circuit specification lt Control circuit gt Pho
210. killer from the inverter s output secondary circuit before installing the MC to switch the motor power Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the primary circuit ON or OFF more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use terminal FWD REV signals or the Gun 08 key The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant and protect the motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the thermal relay If this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL xii Combina tion with peripheral devices Wiring Selecting inverter capacity Transpor tation and storage Discontinuance of power capacitor for power factor correction Discontinuance of surge killer Reducing noise Measures against surge currents Megger test Control circuit wiring length Wiring length between inverter and motor Wiring size Wiring type Grounding Driving general purpose motor Driving special motors Do not mount power capac
211. l the parts causing the short circuit Note ErH is detected only in turning ON the power supply 22 amp Mock alarm L Problem The LED displays the alarm Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Data of the function This setting makes the inverter issue a mock alarm Use this to code H45 has been check out the sequence related to an alarm occurrence set to 1 gt To escape from this alarm state press the key 23 Cof PID feedback wire break Problem The PID feedback wire is broken Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The PID feedback Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected signal wire is broken correctly gt Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath 2 Ahigh intensity noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been was given to implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires somewhere in PID communication cables and main circuit wires a related gt Improve the countermeasures against the noise gt Separate signal wires from main power wires as far as possible 6 23 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar has appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes Wha
212. larm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer driven operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF back to the original values and then restart the operation Check if occurs each time power is switched ON The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 22 21 Hardware error Problem Abnormality on the control PCB or related hardware Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The interface PCB is Remove the interface PCB once and remount it into the card slot wrongly mounted until it clicks into place 2 The capacity is not set The inverter capacity needs to be modified again Bey Om ie Cone gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 3 An abnormality is found Replacement of any boards with an hazard may be required in the interconnection between the control PCB power PCB and interface PCB gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 4 Connection problem Either the control PCB or the option card needs to be replaced between the control PCB and the option gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative card 5 Terminals 13 and 11 Check circuits wires hooking terminals 13 and 11 are short circuited with each other gt Remove al
213. larm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the N Q key while the current alarm code is displayed 3 27 E Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the A IW key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 21 in Section 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time Note E Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing keys simultaneously with the alarm displayed and modify the function code data Figure 3 7 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Alarm occurs gi
214. le at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Automatic Deceleration Disable Mode selection Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Enable Not canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Hz s Overload Prevention Control 0 00 Follow deceleration time specified by F08 E11 0 01 to 100 0 999 Disable 1 Enable limit for braking Gain for Motor 1 o gt ka L o p L o 0 20 H89 o H90 i o PID control feedback line 7 0 1 to 60 0 Detection time H94 o en da E E i 2 Braking response mode 1 Quick H96 STOP Key Priority Start Check Function Data STOP key priority Start check function Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable af a EB ie 1 Clear alarm data and retum to zero H98 Protection Maintenance Function 0 to 31 Display data on the keypad s LED monitor in decimal format 5 71 In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled Mode selection Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically Bit 1 Detect input phase loss Bit 2 Detect output phase loss Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor A codes Motor 2 Parameters Data Default Data setting range Base regerer s0000 uaaa u copying setting Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage
215. lection menu appears 2 Use the and V keys to display Maintenance Information S LHE 3 Press the 9 key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes e g 5_ Li 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the key to return to a list of maintenance items Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 20 Display Items for Maintenance Information LED Monitor Item Description shows Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the time inverter Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 L fw 2 LILI When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again m DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit TH voltage Unit V volts Max Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour temperature of heat sink ru Max effective Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour Capacitance of Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir the DC link bus capacitor in based on the capacita
216. lectric shock or injuries could occur Disposal A CAUTION e Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur Others A WARNING e Never attempt to modify the inverter Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with CE or T V are considered as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC J CAUTION The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground Do not use only a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB as the sole method of electric shock protection Be sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines With overcurrent protection When used with the inverter a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB or magnetic contactor MC should conform to the EN or IEC standards When you use a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB for protection from electric shock in direct or ind
217. leration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 Acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 5 42 E Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire inverter operation Short circuiting the terminals between HLD and CM i e when HLD is ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output frequency m Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms E Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence i Inverter No alarm displayed Turning alarm display on and running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run an M M ALM ON OFF A a i a Reset alarm E Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the TUII
218. leration time specified by H54 ACC DEC Time apply e The inverters status transition between ready for jogging and normal C Note operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped e To start jogging operation with the JOG terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 100 ms the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG E Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz7 Function code data 11 Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 If no Hz2 Hz7 terminal command is assigned the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by default npubterminal command Frequency command source Hz2 Hz1 event OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 ON Follow C30 Frequency command 2 5 44 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Function code data 12 Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2 Switching is possible only when the inverter is stopped Upon completion of switching the digital terminal output Switched to motor 2 SWM2 assigned to any of terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C turns ON If no M2 M7 terminal command is assigned motor 1 is selected by default Input terminal command SWM2 status Selected motor M2 M1 after completion of switching OFF M
219. life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power OFF The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones e An option card or multi function keypad is used e Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus To set data of H98 assign functions to each bit total 5 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to each bit Bit number Bit 3 Bit 1 Judge the life Sa Detect Detect prea Function of DC link bus g output input threshold of DC link bus capacitor Use the factory Disable Disable Disable default Use the user Enable Enable Enable setting Use the fa
220. ling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping Li or LILLI Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise 5 71 Input phase loss protection L Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 7 In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit Note Output phase loss protection 4 __ Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm i Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between factory default setting and your own choice Before specifying the threshold of your own choice measure and confirm the Note reference level in advance Judgment on the
221. lip compensation function and disables auto energy saving operation Using the PG feedback speed control at same time however also disables the slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and the motor speed control accuracy WI MI oO E PG speed feedback control PG interface This control is made available by mounting an optional pulse generator PG interface card It uses the speed feedback from the PG on the motor shaft to control the motor speed with high accuracy 5 37 In the slip compensation and dynamic torque vector control the inverter uses the CN te motor parameters to control its speed Therefore the following conditions should be satisfied if not the inverter may not get the proper performance from the motor e A single motor should be controlled It is difficult to apply this control to a group motor driving system e Motor parameters P02 PO3 and P06 to P12 are properly configured or they are fully auto tuned e The rating of the motor to be controlled should be two ranks lower than that of the inverter If not the output current detection sensibility of the motor lowers causing it difficult to accurately control the motor e The wiring between the inverter output and motor input terminals should not exceed 50 m in length A long wiring run could not suppress the earth leakage current since the cable s electrostatic capacitance against
222. ll occur The forced brake control increases the motor energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if there is braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 Note H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value For example specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time of the motor The H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears in decimal notation on the Note keypad H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of carrier frequency b input phase loss protection c output phase loss protection and d judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC link bus capacitor in a style of combination Bit O to Bit 4 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or coo
223. lling and 1 No abnormalities resistor overheat and cracked insulator visual inspection 2 Check for broken wire 2 Visual inspection 2 Within 10 of or measurement the specified with multimeter resistance under disconnection of one lead Transformer Check for abnormal roaring noise Hearing visual and No abnormalities and reactor and odor smelling inspection Magnetic 1 Check for chatters during 1 Hearing 1 2 contactor eperaton inspection No abnormalities and relay 2 Check for rough contacts 2 Visual inspection 7 2 Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Printed 1 Check for loose screws and 1 Retighten 1 2 3 4 circuit board connectors 2 Smelling and No abnormalities 3 2 Check for odor and discoloration visual inspection 3 Check for cracks breakage 3 4 deformation and remarkable rust Visual inspection 8 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal noise and 1 Hearing and 1 Smooth rotation excessive vibration visual inspection or turn manually be sure to turn 2 the power OFF a 2 Check for loose bolts 2 Retighten 2 3 2 3 Check for discoloration caused by 3 Visual inspection No abnormalities fe overheat O Ventilation Check the heat sink intake and Visual inspection No abnormalities path exhaust ports for clogging and foreign materials
224. m 40 DB15 4C 34 4 FRNO 1E1 70 1000 100 FRNO 2E1 70 500 75 DBO0 75 2 100 50 _ 0 075 FRNO 4E1 70 lads 250 37 FRNO 75E1m 7 0 133 20 FRN1 5E1m 70 73 14 2 4 _ a The FRN4 0E1M 4E is for the EU Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function E98 E99 Terminal FWD and REV Function Function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON CAUTION In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation and the reference frequency e g S81 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz7 Hz PID IVS and LE Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result 5 40 Function code data Active ON Active OFF
225. m outside 16 amp 5 Option card error What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the connector on the option card is properly mating with the connector of the inverter gt Reload the bus option card into the inverter Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable Reinforce noise control measures An error detected by the option card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 6 19 17 amp amp Operation protection Problem You incorrectly operated the inverter Possible Causes 1 The 6 key was pressed when H96 1 or 3 2 The start check function was activated when H96 2or3 3 The forced stop digital input STOP was turned ON 18 amp Tuning error Problem Auto tuning failed Possible Causes 1 Aphase was missing There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor 2 V f or the rated current of the motor was not properly set 3 The connection length between the inverter and the motor was too long What to Check and Suggested Measures Although a Run command had been inputted from the input terminal or through the communications port the inverter was forced to decelerate to stop gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 With a Run command being inputt
226. mal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems e When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be Note recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period e Terminals 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor outputs Y1 and Y2 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one second intervals 5 48 The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Active ON Active OFF Functions assigned
227. minal block cover For inverters with a capacity of less than 5 5 kW To remove the terminal cover put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the main circuit terminal block cover hold its right and left ends with your fingers and slide it toward you Terminal cover EPERRA Main circuit terminal block cover ARTA AAA i E Figure 2 4 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of Less Than 5 5 kW 2 4 2 For inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW To remove the terminal cover first loosen the terminal cover fixing screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the main circuit terminal block cover put your thumbs on the handles of the main circuit terminal block cover and push it up while supporting it with your fingers Refer to Figure 2 5 Terminal cover fixing screw Main circuit terminal block cover Handles Figure 2 5 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover fit it according to the guide on the Note inverter Main circuit terminal block cover Figure 2 6 Mounting the main circuit terminal block cover For Inverters with a Capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW 2 5
228. minals 11 to 13 of the inverter Allows you to monitor the status of the inverter including voltage current and input power as well as to set various parameters in a conversational mode Equipped with a liquid crystal display LCD Also allows you to copy function code data from one FRENIC Multi inverter to another The extension cable connects the RS 485 communications port standard with a keypad or an RS 485 USB converter Three lengths are available 5m 3 m and 1m This makes communication to a PLC or personal computer system easy Option This has a pair of RJ 45 connectors that acts as a transfer port for a multidrop network configuration without using a branch adapter A converter that allows connection of an RS 485 communications port to a USB port on a PC Inverter support loader software Windows GUI Graphics User Interface based that makes setting of function codes easy A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the magnetic contactors mini relays and timers and protects the inverter from malfunctioning A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preven
229. mistor the PTC thermistor you must change data of the function code H26 External alarm Figure 2 12 Internal Circuit Diagram The C1 function V2 function or PTC function can be assigned to terminal C1 Doing so requires setting the slide switch on the interface PCB and configuring the related function code For details refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 11 Analog common Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 and FM Isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 2 17 Classifi cation Analog input Digital input Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol K Note Potentiometer 4 Name Functions Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 13 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric nois
230. mode Table 3 7 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the primary frequency command Q entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 7 Primary Frequency Command Specified with N Q Keys and Requirements PID control Communi LED Frequency Multi cations Cancel PID A Mode Pressing Q selection monitor command frequency frequency link control keve conicola E43 operation Hz PID y J01 LE OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output ON Keypad primary PID command disabled Frequency OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output Other than the above ON Current primary PID command disabled Frequency Link disabled F01 0 LE OFF Primary frequency SS2 SS1 OFF command from keypad Frequency setting O other than above via link r Multi frequency command Final frequency command PID cancel Hz PID ON PID output as frequency command 3 10 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the key starts P KEYPAD running the motor in the forward direction and emin CONTROL pressing the 6 key decelerates the motor to san OPE stop The key is enabled only in Running mode The motor rotational direction can be selected by changing the setting of fu
231. motors In running special motors Driving a 400 V general purpose motor Torque characteristics and temperature rise Vibration Noise High speed motors Explosion proof motors Submersible motors and pumps Brake motors Geared motors When driving a 400V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their reinforced insulation When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof rubber is recommended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s When an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or highe
232. n Anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 e Overload stop Hit and stop J65 3 Note When the JOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function m Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency To enable this IPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency beforehand m Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an mm corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm i and shuts down its output Refer to the description of E34 E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated E Fr
233. n five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur 5 2 Overview of Function Follow the procedure below to solve p oldes 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor No alarm code appears on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation Go to Section 6 2 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 If the speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed 5 If grating sound can be heard 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time 7 Even if the power recovers after an instantaneous power failure the motor does not restart 8 The inverter does not run as expected Problems with inverter settings Qo to Section 6 2 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed f an alarm code appears on the LED monitor Goto Section 6 3 f an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor Goto S
234. n will not detect input phase loss if any Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running Yes and during running stopping the inverter output Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink LiH i Yes temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload Discharging and inverter operation are stopped due to cert Yes overheating of an external braking resistor Function codes must be set corresponding to the braking resistor 1 This alarm on 30A B C should be ignored depending upon the function code setting 8 15 LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar Yes protection Transistor IGBT internal temperature calculated from the output current and temperature of inside the inverter is over the preset value External alarm Places the inverter in alarm stop state upon receiving digital Lint Yes input input signal THR Electronic In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to i Yes thermal protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal overload overload protection setting Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range F10 1 Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range F10 2 The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by F11 and F12 For motor 2 read F10 to F12 as A06 to A08 IILI PTC A PTC thermistor
235. nce when shipping as 100 capacitor Refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours D ric I LI boards When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan time of the This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control cooling fan function code H06 is enabled and the fan is stopped Daa Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 3 23 LED Monitor shows Z me Z Sz I LILI Me LII Table 3 20 Display Items for Maintenance Information Continued Item Number of startups Input watt hour Input watt hour data Number of RS 485 errors standard Content of RS 485 communications error standard Number of option errors Inverter s ROM version Keypad s ROM version Number of RS 485 errors option Content of RS 485 communication
236. nction code F02 E Operational relationship between function code F02 Operation method and key Table 3 8 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the key which determines the motor rotational direction Table 3 8 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02 Data for F02 Pressing the key runs the motor In the direction commanded by the terminal FWD or REV Note Forward key disabled The motor is driven by terminal Y J Reverse FWD or REV command n e onward ClecHon Note The rotational direction of aa IEC compliant motors is opposite In the reverse direction to that of the motor shown here For the details on operations with function code F02 refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES When the keypad is in use for specifying the frequency settings or driving the motor do not disconnect the keypad from the inverter when the motor is running Doing so may stop the inverter Note 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 9 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter en
237. nd BX Coast to a stop OFF and ON or at the restart by auto reset the inverter applies the delay time specified by H13 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H13 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied CN A e Be sure to auto tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling ote motor speed e When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts in normal mode e In auto search with the restart after momentary power failure enabled F14 4 or 5 and the allowable momentary power failure time specified H16 turning a run command ON will start auto search even if the time specified by H16 has elapsed e During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search e Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below e Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events 5 66 H11 Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 Function 0 Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration commands specified by HO7 Acceleration deceleration pattern F08 Deceleration time 1 and E11 Deceleration time 2
238. nd saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of these controls auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop e The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor e Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long e A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter LL For details of auto tuning refer to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data P05 Motor 1 Online tuning The primary and secondary resistances R1 and R2 will change as the motor temperature rises PO5 allows you to tune this change when the inverter is in operation online a aii Motor 1 No load current R1 X and Motor 1 Rated slip frequency PO6 through P0O8 and P12 specify no load current R1 X and rated slip frequency respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning
239. not turn the main circuit power circuit breaker ON or OFF in order to start or stop inverter operation Doing so could cause failure Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy Before changing the frequency speed setting check the specifications of the motor and machinery e The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means Injuries could occur Wiring length for EMC filter built in type ACAUTION e When the wiring length between the inverter and motor exceeds 10 m the filter circuit may be overheated and damaged due to increase of leakage current To reduce the leakage current set the motor sound carrier frequency to 2 kHz or below with function code F26 Otherwise a failure could occur Maintenance and inspection parts replacement and installation of an option card A WARNING e Turn the power OFF and wait for at least five minutes before starting inspection parts replacement and installation of an option card Further check that the LED monitor is unlit and that the DC link bus voltage between the P and N terminals is lower than 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Otherwise e
240. note e If P99 4 Other motors the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of H03 Fuji standard 8 series e The inverter also supports motors rated by HP horse power typical in North America P99 1 Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the Q keys or Q keys simultaneous keying Data for H03 Function Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection Function codes subject to initialization P01 P03 PO6 to P12 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection Function codes subject to initialization A15 A17 A20 to A26 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages e To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows 1 P02 A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW Motor Rated capacity P99 A39 Select the characteristics of the motor Motor Selection H03
241. o search for idling motor speed at starting Switch to speed feedback control PG Hz 6 Force to stop STOP Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components Hold PID integral component PID HLD Activate the limit switch at start point LS 6 Start reset S R 6 Switch to the serial pulse receiving SPRM 6 mode Enter the return mode RTN 6 Enable overload stop OLS 6 Run forward FWD Run reverse REV Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively 6 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 5 6 C codes Control Functions Code C01 c02 c03 C04 Co5 Co6 C07 c08 Cog C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C41 C42 C43 C44 C50 C51 C52 C53 Name Jump Frequency 1 Multi Frequency Jogging Frequenc Timer Operation Frequency Command 2 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Polarity Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Analog Inpu
242. oad shaft speed or line speed or to the output frequency before slip compensation to be applied for monitor If the constant feeding rate time is 999 9 min or more or the denominator of the right hand side is zero 0 999 9 appears E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data wt Use this coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ i ina part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing note be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated E59 Terminal C1 Signal Definition C1 V2 function E59 defines the property of terminal C1 for either a current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function or a voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function In addition to this setting you need to turn SW7 on the interface PCB to the corresponding position as listed below Data for E59 Input configuration SW7 position 0 Current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function 1 Voltage input O to 10 VDC V2 function 5 53 E61 Terminal 12 Extended Function E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function C1 function E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function V2 function E61 E62 and E63 define the property of terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function respectively There is no need
243. oblem persists When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem persists 2 The desired menu is not displayed Possible Causes 1 The limiting menus function was not selected appropriately Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad Menu display mode gt Change the data of function code E52 so that the desired menu can be displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed Possible Causes 1 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running 2 The data of the function codes is protected 3 The WE KP command Enable data change with keypad is not input though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal 4 The key was not pressed G The setting data of function code F02 E01 through E05 E98 and E99 could not be changed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes Check the data of function
244. oe Output frequency Before slip ESEJ compensation w lg 50 09 Output frequency CRS After slip compensation ro sna Torque limit value eae z a Level 2 s J Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 3 16 Basic key operation To monitor the running status on the drive monitor set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the N and keys to display Drive Monitoring Sic 3 Press the 9 key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 3_ iL 4 Use the and keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the key to return to a list of monitoring items Press the key again to return to the menu LED monitor shows a Tw LILI I fic I LI I Fic I LI I Pics ILII I mw Aa Il Item Output frequency Output frequency Output current Output voltage Calculated torque Reference frequency Rotational direction Running status Motor speed Load shaft speed or Line speed PID command PID feedback amount Torque limit value Torque limit value Table 3 12 Drive Monitor Display Items Unit Hz Hz A V
245. of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 refer to function code H98 2 Place the inverter in stopped state 3 Place the inverter in the state of power off under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Switch OFF the inverter Measure the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and save the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Switch ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 100 Note f the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Check whether there has been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement again To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment set H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0002 the original values will be restored Hereafter each time the inverter is switched OFF the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is automatically measured if the above condition is met
246. oment of the build up of the braking torque inertia of the mechanical load and the coupling mechanism _ It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking C TIP terminal command DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque 5 33 In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip Q Note frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur F23 Starting Frequency 1 F24 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time F25 Stop Frequency F39 Stop Frequency Holding time At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 sp
247. on The display can the characters be read and there is no fault Structure such 1 Abnormal noise and excessive 1 Visual or hearing 1 2 3 4 5 as frame and vibration inspection No abnormalities 2 Loosen bolts tightened parts 2 Retighten 3 Deformation and breakage 3 4 5 4 Discoloration and deformation Visual inspection caused by overheat 5 Check for foulness and dust Common 1 Check if bolts and screws are 1 Retighten 1 2 3 tight and not missing Novabnonnalities 2 Check the devices and insulators 2 3 for deformation cracks breakage Visual inspection and discoloration caused by overheat and deterioration 3 Check for foulness and dust Conductor 1 Check the conductor for 1 2 1 2 and wire discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the cable for cover Visual inspection No abnormalities cracks and discoloration Terminal Check that the terminals are not Visual inspection No abnormalities block damaged P DC link bus 1 Check for electrolyte leakage 1 2 1 2 capacitor discoloration cracks and swelling Visual inspection No abnormalities be of the case 3 2 Check if the safety valve does not 2 protrude remarkably k 3 Measure the capacitance if 3 Measure 3 The discharge necessary discharge time time is not with capacitance shorter than time probe specified by the replacement manual Braking 1 Check for odor caused by 1 Sme
248. on motor rated torque Braking torque limit value B based on motor rated torque 3 17 E Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3 13 Table 3 14 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 15 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Notation Table 3 13 Running Status Bit Assignment Content Bit Notation Content when neton gode data Is VL 1 under voltage limiting control being written Always 0 TL 1 under torque limiting control 1 when the DC link bus voltage is Always 0 NUV higher than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when ready for run and frequency commands via communications link BRK 1 during braking 1 when the inverter output is shut down EXT 1 during DC braking 4 when an alarm has occurred INT 1 during deceleration 1 during running in the reverse REY direction 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the forward Eo direction 1 under current limiting control Table 3 14 Running Status Display LED4 LED2 LED1 15 14 13 12 T 6 5 3 2 1 0 BUSY WR RL VL TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 E Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal
249. on occurrence of a momentary power failure Tip When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure the auto search mode can apply which detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor without stopping it Refer to HO9 A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur 5 28 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OF
250. on pages 5 15 and 5 16 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 0 to 0 40 0 01 fo 0 20 5 11 J codes Application Functions Data Default Refer to copying i Incre Code Name Data setting range Cc z setting page Zz lt J01 PID Control Mode selection Disable Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control UP DOWN keys on keypad PID command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control J02 Remote command SV Command via communications link J03 P Gain 0 001 time 0 100 J04 Integral time J05 D Differential time 0 01 s J06 Feedback filter J10 Anti reset windup 200 J11 Select alarm output Absolute value alarm 1 Absolute value alarm with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm Deviation alarm with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch 100 to 100 100 to 100 N jo jo J12 Upper level alarm AH J13 Lower level alarm AL Lo o SIs eae kdd n o N J18 Upper limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 The F15 data applies J19 Lower limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 The F16 data applies J56 Speed command filter 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 0 10 J57 Dancer reference
251. ontroller X lt Control circuit gt 24 VDC 24 VDC Ot 6 X1 to X5 0 fH X1 to X5 FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler O Q CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 17 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 2 19 Classifi cation Analog output Pulse output Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Name Analog monitor FMA function Pulse monitor FMP function common Analog Functions The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V is output You can select FMA function with slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 e Output frequency 1 Before slip compensation e Output frequency 2 After slip compensation e Output current e Output voltage e Output torque e Load factor e Input power e PID feedback amount PV e PG feedback value e DC link bus voltage Universal AO e Motor output e Calibration e PID command SV e PID output MV Input impedance of external device Min 5kQ 0 to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting O to 10 VDC it is capable to drive up to two meters with 10
252. or resistor SW3 RJ 45 connector face pin assignment Figure 2 20 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the standard keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment C e Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as Note possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions e Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit e The RJ 45 connector pin assignment on the FRENIC Multi series is different from that on the FVR E11S series Do not connect to the keypad of the FVR E11S series of inverter Doing so could damage the internal control circuit CN t Mounting the interface printed circuit board interface PCB 9 e Usually you do not need to remove the interface PCB However if you remove the interface PCB be sure to mount the interface PCB by putting hooks provided on the interface PCB into the inverter until you have heard click sound Hooks Interface printed i circuit board Nga interface PCB TE Figure 2 21 Mounting the Interface Printed Circuit B 2 22 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches WARNING Before changing the switches turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a c
253. or 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi function keypad 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Shipping Destination on page 5 14 6 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information E codes continued Default Code Data setting range i setting E98 Terminal FWD Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals FWD and REV as listed below E99 Terminal REV Function 1000 Select multi frequency SS1 1001 Select multi frequency SS2 1002 Select multi frequency SS4 1003 Select multi frequency SS8 1004 Select ACC DEC time RT1 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 1007 Coast to a stop BX 1008 Reset alarm RST 1009 Enable extemal alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency Enable data change with keypad Cancel PID control Switch normal inverse operation Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus Universal DI Enable aut
254. or is running P04 or A18 2 In the case of Tuning while the motor is running P04 or A18 2 also adjust the acceleration and deceleration times FO7 and F08 and set the rotation direction properly so that it matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system Data for Motor parameters Tuna Wie Selection condition P04 A18 subjected to tuning g typ of tuning type Primary resistance Tuning the R1 and X The motor cannot be rotated R1 with the motor being or more than 50 of the rated Leakage reactance stopped load would be applied on the X motor if rotated Primary resistance Tuning the R1 X and Even if the motor is rotated it R1 rated slip frequency with is safe and the load applied Leakage reactance the motor being stopped on the motor would be no X Tuning the no load current more than 50 of the rating 2 Nadoad curent with the motor running at If you do the tuning with no 50 of the base frequency load you will get the highest Rated slip frequency precision Lastly tuning the rated slip frequency with the motor being stopped Upon completion of the tuning each motor parameter will be automatically saved into the applicable function code 3 Preparation of machine system Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling and deactivating the safety device Switch to the motor 1 or motor 2 which the tuning is to be perf
255. ormed on Tuning results by P04 will be applied to P codes for the motor 1 and the tuning results by A18 will be applied to A codes for the motor 2 Cote Assigning the command Switch to motor 2 SWM2 to any of the terminal Y1 ote Y2 or 30A B C will automatically switch the output status of SWM2 depending on the motor selected for the tuning 4 Perform tuning D Set function code P04 or A18 to 1 or 2 and press the key The blinking of or z on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command for the rotation direction selected The factory default is key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation change the data of function code F02 3 Thedisplay of or Z stays lit and tuning takes place while the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 s IfP04 or A18 2 the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning takes place Upon completion of measurements the motor will decelerate to a stop Tuning will continue after the motor is stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 10 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as the run command F02 1 Erud will appear upon completion of the measurements The run command is turned OFF The run command given through the keypad or the communications link is automatically turned OFF CV LITT The tuning completes and the next function code _ 5 or mizi appears on the keypad 4 3 E Err
256. ors during tuning Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the results of the tuning or any error in the process of the tuning it will display and discard the tuning data Listed below are the abnormal or error conditions that can be recognized during tuning Possible tuning Details error Causes Error in tuning An interphase voltage unbalance has been detected results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter Output current ai An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to Sequence error stop BX Coast to a stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Error due to limitation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these conditions has occurred either eliminate the abnormal or error factor s and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative If a filter other than Fuji optional output filter OFL LILILI 4A is connected to CN te the inverters output secondary circuit the result of tuning can be unpredi
257. otor E Detection level J64 J64 specifies the detection level assuming the inverter rated current and motor rated torque as 100 When J65 3 Hit and stop the detection level J64 is determined based on not the Note J63 data but the motor rated toque 5 73 M Mode selection J65 J65 specifies operation when the load amount exceeds that of one specified by J64 0 The inverter cancels the overload stop function The inverter decelerate to stops the motor by the 1 Decelerate to stop a ee specified deceleration time The inverter shuts down the output immediately and the 2 Coast to a stop motor coast to stops The inverter decelerates the motor with the torque limit operation and is controlling the output current to keep the hold toque until the run command turned OFF Make 3 Hit and stop the mechanical brake turn ON before turning the run command OFF The inverter issues an alarm IOL or OL2 during the hit and stop operation CN A e Once the overload stop function is activated the inverter holds it and cannot oe accelerate the motor again To reaccelerate the motor turn the run command OFF and ON again e If J65 3 the inverter ignores the driving toque limit operation already specified M Operation condition J66 J66 specifies the inverter s operation state to apply the overload stop function Note that carefully specify it so as not to induce a malfunction by any setting that is not needed
258. otor 1 OFF ON Motor 2 ON Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed below The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured Function code name For Motor 1 Maximum Frequency F03 A01 Base Frequency F04 A02 Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 Maximum Output Voltage F06 Torque Boost F09 A05 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level F11 Thermal time constant F12 A08 DC Braking Braking starting frequency F20 A09 Braking level F21 Braking time F22 Starting Frequency F23 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 Control Mode Selection F42 Motor No of poles P01 Rated capacity P02 Rated current P03 Auto tuning P04 Online tuning P05 No load current P06 A20 R1 P07 A21 X P08 Slip compensation gain for driving P09 Slip compensation response time P10 A24 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 Rated slip frequency P12 Motor Selection P99 Slip Compensation Operating conditions H68 A40 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41 Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 Startup Times of Motor H44 A46 5 45 Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes Confirm the settings of those function codes before use Related function codes Rotation direction limitation H08 Overload stop Disabled J63 to
259. otor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 100 of starting torque Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Note Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 7 r ttt ttt ttre t ttt gy F05 Increased output voltage using torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Torque boost 1 F09 f Output frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 5 24 F10 F11 F12 e Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load
260. otor output E g 9 85 Menu 2 Menu 3 Maintenance Info Menu 5 GHE LZ Alarm Info Menu 6 4 PID feedback value Eg 3 200 Alarm mode Y Display of alarm status F Occurence of an alarm Latest alarm code aa Eg Press these keys if an alarm has occured RQ P 4 we RESET R 7 x Last alarm code Eg 3rd last alarm code E g 3 074 1 The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the seven speed monitor items by using function code E48 2 Applicable only when PID control is active J01 1 2 or 3 3 The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 4 Applicable only when the full menu mode is selected E52 2 5 Pressing key can reset an alarm only when the latest alarm is displayed on the LED monitor Figure 3 1 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode 3 3 3 3 Running Mode When the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters Running mode in which you can 1 Monitor the running status e g output frequency and output current 2 Configure the reference frequency and other settings 3 Run stop the motor and 4 Jog inch the motor 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the eleven items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed P
261. ox W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K 2 7 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure E Figure A L1 R L2 S L3 T _P1 P NO L1 L2 L3 Filter output Note 2 Note 1 Terminal screw type is listed in the table below Inverter type Screw type FRN5 5E1E 20 FRN7 5E1E 20 are FRN11E1E 20 Hxagon FRN15E1E 20 a A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A C J or K Note 2 Cables of EMC filter output are already connected to inverter input by factory default 2 8 2 The control circuit terminals common to all models PEEP Screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 N m Table 2 5 Control Circuit Terminal Block circuit terminals for ferrule Wire strip length ire strip teng for Europe type terminal block Screwdriver type Allowable wire size __ zzz ER L i W Flat screw driver AWG26 to AWG16 0 6 x 3 5 mm 0 14 to 1 5 mm 6mm 2 51 W x 1 76 H mm Manufacturer of ferrules Phoenix Contact Inc Refer to Table 2 6 Tabl
262. pact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor in both the acceleration deceleration starting and ending zones Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration are available 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acceleration deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Output frequency Acc time Dec time Reference Reference Maximum Acc time Dec time frequency ae Ga emeren cdi oo ee F03 A01 5 64 Acceleration deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is 20 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration or deceleration time Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant to
263. ping a jumper bar is connected across the terminals P1 and P on the terminal block Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR Include an OFL in the inverter power output Secondary circuit to 1 Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high surge voltage 2 Suppress leakage current from the power output lines due to harmonic components This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long power feed lines It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept to less than 400 m 3 Minimize emission and or induction noise issued from the power output lines OFLs are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines such as those used in plants etc Note Use an output circuit secondary filter of OFL OOO DA An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency noise caused by switching operation for the power supply primary lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL for 4 turns coiled 3 times Use 4 ACLs and let the power supply lines pass through them when the sizes of the power supply lines are large If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply primary lines if itis more than 20 m insert it to the power output Secondary lines of the inverter e This option
264. ponsible for local adjustments or trial operation 5 Service contents The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs Depending on the request these can be discussed separately 6 Applicable scope of service Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately 7 11 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series Specifications Type FRN__ _E1S 20 Nominal applied motor kW Rated capacity kVA Rated voltage V Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function 0 8 1 5 3 0 5 0 8 0 0 7 1 4 2 5 4 2 7 0 Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 for 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 with DCR 0 57 0 93 1 6 3 0 5 7 8 3 14 0 21 1 without DCR 1 1 1 8 3 1 5 3 9 5 13 2 22 2 31 5 Required power supply capacity kVA 8 0 2 0 3 0 6 1 1 2 0 2 9 4 9 7 4 Torque 9 150 100 70 40 Torque 10 DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Rated current A Output ratings Rated current
265. position 100 to 100 1 J58 Detection width of dancer 0 Disable switching PID constant So 3 a fo Jo Jo E ta a oa 5 x position deviation 1 to 100 J59 P Gain 2 0 000 to 30 000 1 1 0 100 J60 Integral time 2 0 0 to 3600 0 1 J61 D Differential time 2 0 00 to 600 00 1 0 01 J62 PID control block selection Bit 0 PID output polarity 0 addition 1 subtraction Bit 1 Select compensation of output ratio 0 Ratio relative to the main setting 1 Speed command relative to maximum frequency J63 Overload Stop 0 Torque Detection value 1 Current J64 Detection level J65 Mode selection Disable Decelerate to stop g I wo DN 100 Coast to a stop Hit and stop J66 Operation condition Enable at constant speed and during deceleration 0 1 2 3 0 1 Enable at constant speed Enable anytime J67 0 00 to 600 00 J68 Braking Signal 0 to 200 Brake OFF current J69 Brake OFF frequency 0 0 to 25 0 J70 Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 J71 Brake ON frequency 0 0 to 25 0 J72 Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display 2 a x v Jo 3 o 0 01 s 100 q A N 1 0 running Y o II lo ITI afifo ofolo Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 4 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9
266. ption 20 amp F Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer operation which are specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF Possible Causes 1 The voltage fed to the control PCB dropped suddenly while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF because the DC link bus was rapidly discharged 2 Ahigh intensity noise affected the operation of the inverter while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF 3 The control circuit failed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus electricity After pressing the key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer driven operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control After pressing the key and releasing the a
267. put current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliamperes mA ILI Lin Output voltage to analog meters Shows the output voltage on terminal FM in volts V FM AGI Pulse rate of FM Shows the output pulse rate on terminal FM in pulses per second p s Fa Input voltage on terminal C1 Shows the input voltage on terminal C1 V2 function assigned in volts V Option control circuit terminal Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals on I O the digital I O interface option Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals on digital I O interface option on page 3 22 for details PG pulse rate 1 Shows the PG pulse rate inputted when the PG A B phase interface is installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 i5 PG pulse rate 1 Z phase Shows the pulse rate p s in Z phase when the PG interface is installed PG pulse rate 2 Shows the second PG pulse rate inputted when two A B phase PG interfaces are installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 it PG pulse rate 2 Z phase Shows the second PG pulse rate p s in Z phase when two PG interfaces are installed 3 20 E Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminals may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display e Display I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 17 and the figure below each of segments a to g on
268. r can also result in higher noise level If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for safe operation When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for brake must be supplied from the primary circuit If the power supply for brake is connected to the inverter s output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series connected brakes If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation xi In running special motors Environ mental conditions Combina tion with peripheral devices Synchronous motors Single phase motors Installation location Installing an MCCB or RCD ELCB Installing an MC in the secondary circuit Installing an
269. r installed Power 5 m or less input TS Output circuit filter S is I omes m or less 50 m or less CNote e Do not connect a power factor correcting capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter s output lines Secondary circuit e If the wiring length is long the stray capacitance between the wires will increase resulting in an outflow of the leakage current It will activate the overcurrent protection increase the leakage current or will not assure the accuracy of the current display In the worst case the inverter could be damaged e lf more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors 2 13 Cote Driving 400 V class series motor e f a thermal relay is installed in the path between the inverter and the motor to protect the motor from overheating the thermal relay may malfunction even with a wiring length shorter than 50 m In this situation add an output circuit filter option or lower the carrier frequency Function code F26 e If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage that is generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Consider any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands t
270. r rotation P04 or A18 2 was attempted while the brake was applied to the motor What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the inverter by three or more orders of class or larger by two or more orders of class gt Check whether it is possible to replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 or A20 A21 and A22 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 gt Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation P04 or A18 1 gt Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation P04 or A18 2 For details of tuning errors refer to Errors during Tuning in Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 19 amp amp RS 485 communications error E F RS 485 communications error Option card Problem Possible Causes 1 Conditions for communications differ between the inverter and host equipment Even though no response error detection time y08 y18 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle Host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers did not operate due to incorrect settings and or defectiv
271. r when the alarm occurred Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 21 lists the details of the alarm information Lire List of alarm codes Running status info at the time AJTO an alarm occurred Item Hea Output frequency Switching at approx conn l 1 second intervals Le Lig OLO Item Output current Switching at approx 1 second intervals a lt e amp ES Item roe Error sub code Switching at approx 1 second intervals A Same as above Same as above Same as above Figure 3 6 Alarm Information Menu Transition D 3 25 Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 6 LED monitor item No Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the and V keys to display Alarm Information 5 41 Press the key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g Li In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history Each time the N or Q key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most recentoneas sand 4 While the alarm code is displayed press the 9 ke
272. rcuit terminals Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Power ee Terminal Tightening Ground Tightening supply Lie ae Inverter type screw torque ing screw torque Refer to voltage kW size N m size N m 0 1 FRNO 1E1 20 0 2 FRNO 2E1 20 04 FRNO4E1m 20 1 2 M3 5 1 2 Figure A 0 75 FRNO 75E1 20 1 5 FRN1 5E1m 20 22 FRN2 2E1m 20 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 3 7 FRN3 7E1m 20 Tse FRN5 5E1S 20 3 8 Figure C 500 V ERN5 5E1E 20 1 8 a as Figure F FRN7 5E1S 20 3 8 Figure C 7 5 Input M4 M5 3 8 FRN7 5E1E 20 Output M5 1 8 Figure F 4 4 FRN11E1S 20 5 8 Figure C 5 FRN11E1E 20 i 8 1 Figure F 7 FRN15E1S 20 5 8 m 7 Figure C FRN15E1E 20 8 1 Figure F 0 4 FRNO 4E1m 40 0 75 FRNO 75E1 40 1 5 FRN1 5E1m 40 39 ERN 2E1 40 M 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 3 7 FRN3 7E1m 40 4 0 FRN4 0E1 4E FRN5 5E1S 40 3 8 Figure C 400 V FRN7 5E1S 40 3 8 Figure C 7 5 Input M4 M5 3 8 FRN7 5E1E 40 Output M5 1 8 Figure F FRN11E1S 40 5 8 Figure C 11 Input M4 M6 5 8 l FRN11E1E 40 Output M6 1 8 Figure F FRN15E1S 40 5 8 Figure C 5 5 Input M4 M5 3 8 Three FRN5 5E1E 40 Output M5 1 8 Figure F phase 5 5 6 5 5 6 15 Input M4 M6 5 8 l FRN15E1E 40 AE 1 8 Figure F 0 1 FRN0 1E1m 70 0 2 FRNO 2E1m 70 oa 1 2 Figure D i 0 4 FRNO0 4E1m 70 ue Men ae booy __0 75__ FRNO 75E1m 70 15 FRN1 5E1m 70 2 2 FRN2 2E1 70 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4 0E1S 4E to be shipped to the EU is 4 0 kW Note 1 A b
273. ress the gt key to switch between monitor items For details of switching the monitor item by using the S key refer to Monitor of running status in Running mode in Figure 3 1 Table 3 3 Monitoring Items Display a A sample on LED indicator i FUNGON Monitor items the LED m ON O OFF Unit Meaning of displayed value o monitor 1 TON t Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor 0 Pere ener and LED indicators Output frequency before slip SGL Hz OA OkW Hz Frequency actually being output E48 0 compensation Output frequency after slip SOLL Hz OA OkW Hz Frequency actually being output E48 1 compensation Reference frequency SGL mHz OA OkW Hz Reference frequency being set E48 2 120 Output frequency Hz x Motor speed SGI MHz BA OkW r min E48 3 For motor 2 read P01 as A15 Load shaft speed JGG MHz MA OkW r min Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 Line speed JL OHz A kW m min Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 5 E50 Constant feeding Hz OA OkW min 2O E48 6 rate time Output frequency Hz x E39 l z5 Current output from the inverter 1I ee Output current ce r OHz mA OkW in RMS Voltage output from the inverter Output voltage 2 JGZ OHz OA Okw er ny ane Motor output torque in Calculated torque mHz OA OkW Calculated value Input power 475 OHz OA mkW kW Input power to the inverter 9 3 4 Table
274. rity 1 stop bit for Modbus RT U 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RT U 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RT U 0 2 bits 1 1 bit 0 No detection 1 to 60 0 Modbus RTU protocol 1 FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol 1 to 255 Immediately trip with alam E Trip with alam after running for the period specified by timer y13 2 0 n 0 1 oO 0 0 01 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alam If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps 1 7 bits 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RT U 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RT U 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RT U 0 2 bits 1 1 bit 0 No detection 1 to 60 0 00 to 1 00 0 Modbus RTU protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol jo N fo fo 0 Frequency command Follow H30 data Via field bus option Follow H30 data Via field bus option Frequency command Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Run command Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Via field bus option Run command Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Via RS 485 link Loader Shipping Destination Taiw
275. rors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Fuji Electric Co Ltd Gate City Ohsaki East Tower 11 2 Osaki 1 chome Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0032 Japan URL hitp www fujielectric com Sm 2011 04 D11c C06 30CM
276. rque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor Choose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time taking into account the Note machinery s load torque H09 H49 Starting Mode Auto search and Delay time HO9 specifies the auto search mode for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search applies to both a restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and every normal startup The auto search mode can be switched by assigning an STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E05 function code data 26 If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by default Auto search for idling motor speed Starting the inverter with a run command ON BX OFF auto reset etc with STM being ON searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1 2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it After completion of the auto search the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time Frequency command 5 Motor speed l l l 1 l IOo I l Starting mode l I Delay t
277. rrent limiter of the current limit control block shown in FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 Chapter 4 Section 4 4 Figure 4 3 1 The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter 999 If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control Note F15 F16 Frequency Limiter High and Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows e If H63 0 the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 e If H63 1 the inverter decelerates to stop the motor e When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the Q Note reference frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 A01 accordingly e Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 A12 and F15 gt F25 F03 A01 gt F16 where F23 A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency If you specify any wrong data for th
278. rrent value or recommended wire size When several inverters drive motors do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor rating listed in the standard specifications table for the inverter When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration is required select an inverter with one rank larger capacity than the standard Select an inverter that meets the following condition Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment pack them in a previously fumigated wooden crate Do not fumigate them after packing since some parts inside the inverter may be corroded by halogen compounds such as methyl bromide used in fumigation When packing an inverter alone for export use a laminated veneer lumber LVL For other transportation and storage instructions see Chapter 1 Section 1 3 Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage Environment xiii How this manual is organized This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 10 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the inverter Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER This chapter provides operating environment precautions for installing the inverter wiring
279. rror caused by noise Era Yes detection or some other factors this function stops the inverter Not applicable 8 16 Name Option communications error detection Option error detection Operation protection Tuning error detection RS 485 communications error detection Data save error during under voltage RS 485 communications error detection optional Retry Surge protection Command loss detected Description Upon detection of an error in the communication between the inverter and an optional card stops the inverter output When an option card has detected an error this function stops the inverter output STOP Pressing the key on the keypad forces the key inverter to decelerate and stop the motor even if the priority inverter is running by any run commands given via the terminals or communications link operation After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm 4 The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays Eri on the 7 segment LED monitor if any run function command is present when Powering up An alarm is released the key is turned ON or an alarm reset RST is input Enable communications link LE has been activated and the run command is active in the linked source During tuning of motor parameters if the tuning has failed or has aborted or an abnormal condition has been detected in the tuning result the inverter stops its output W
280. s 2 A surge current entered the input power supply 3 The deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia for load 4 The acceleration time was too short 5 Braking load was too heavy 6 Malfunction caused by noise 3 7dd Undervoltage Problem Possible Causes 1 Amomentary power failure occurred 2 The power to the inverter was switched back on too soon with F14 1 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the range of the inverter s specifications What to Check and Suggested Measures If within the same power supply a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON or OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge temporary precipitous rise in voltage or current may be caused in the input power Install a DC reactor Recalculate the deceleration torque from the moment of inertia for load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 and H56 gt Enable the regenerative braking H69 2 4 or deceleration characteristics H71 1 gt Enable torque limiter F41 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and A03 to 0 to improve braking ability Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 and E10 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F0
281. s error option Option s ROM version Cumulative motor run time Description Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Unit 100 kWh Display range 0 001 to 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitor s resolution e g the resolution varies between 0 001 0 01 0 1 or 1 To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 1000000 kWh it returns to 0 Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9999 Unit None Display range 0 001 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 Shows the
282. s judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not E Reference loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed Refer to the description of E65 Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or the DC braking is in operation E Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of H70 E Current detected and Current detected 2 ID and ID2 Function code data 37 38 The ID or D2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detection Level or E37 Current detection 2 Level for the time longer than the one sp
283. s that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires correctly to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 6 2 Possible Causes 7 A frequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active 8 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly 9 The coast to stop command was effective 10 Broken wire incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor 11 Overload 12 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 13 Miss poor connection of the DC reactor DCR What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the drive command block Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings e g cancel the higher priority run command Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter high and F16 Frequency limiter low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting Check the cabling and wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them Measure the output current gt Lighten the loa
284. s the simultaneous keying Q keys from 0 to P and WN keys from P to 0 y codes Link Functions Code yo1 y02 03 y04 y05 yo6 y07 y08 y09 y10 y11 y12 13 y14 y15 y16 y17 y18 19 y20 Name RS 485 Communication Standard Station address Communications error processing Timer Baud rate Data length Parity check Stop bits No response error detection time Response interval Protocol selection RS 485 Communication Option Station address Communications error processing Timer Baud rate Data length Parity check Stop bits No response error detection time Bus Link Function Loader Link Function Mode selection Function code F03 A01 F04 A02 F05 A03 F06 A04 F14 F26 E31 E46 NI Response interval Protocol selection Mode selection Asia 60 0 60 0 220 380 60 0 R Default Data setting range setting Incre Unit ment runnin Data copying ing a A A a es ee 1 N Y 1 0 Immediately trip with alam Y Y 1 Trip with alarm 4 after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alam 4 If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run 0 0 to 60 0 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps 1 7 bits 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even pa
285. sary to connect an AC reactor to the power factor correcting capacitors 2 Noise If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter into the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For the control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit or ground Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any
286. seeeee ees 8 8 8 5 1 Standard models ccccceeeeeeee ee 8 8 8 5 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type 0 8 11 8 5 3 Standard keypad 8 14 8 6 Protective Functions c cc ccceceeeeeeeee 8 15 Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS eipc getestaealartatis 9 1 Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS 10 1 10 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification 10 1 10 1 1 General 10 1 10 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Multi in systems to be certified by UL and cUL 10 1 10 2 Compliance with European Standards 10 1 10 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 10 2 10 3 1 Generalerna 10 2 10 3 2 Recommended installation procedure on noc eu A 10 2 10 3 3 Leakage current from EMC filter built in type inverters or inverters with an external EMC complaint filter OPUON Al erri ti ttt het 10 5 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the Fe EE E E E E EEE 10 7 10 4 1 General comments ccceeeeees 10 7 10 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation 10 8 10 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive TARA O E Rect nece Raat haan Reon iter Reon Aeon ear ae 10 8 10 51 Generalissimo 10 8 10 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC Multi series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU eee 10 8 xvi Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER
287. sert a DC braking resistor between the terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire 2 14 When a DC reactor DCR is not connected together with the braking resistor 1 Remove the screws from terminals P1 and P together with the jumper bar AN fr 2 Put the wire from terminal P of the braking resistor and the jumper bar on terminal P in this order then secure them with the screw removed in 1 above 3 Tighten the screw on terminal P1 4 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to the DB of the inverter Figure 2 10 Braking Resistor Connection without DC Reactor DCR F When _connecting a DC _reactor DCR together with the braking resistor gt 1 Remove the screw from terminal P 2 Overlap the DC reactor DCR wire and braking resistor wire P as shown at left and then secure them to terminal P of the inverter with the screw a 3 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to terminal DB of the inverter gt We 0 4 Do not use the jumper bar Figure 2 11 Braking Resistor Connection with DC Reactor DCR DC link bus terminals P and N These are provided for the DC link bus powered system Connect these terminals with terminals P and N of other inverters Note Consult your Fuji Electri
288. settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 41 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Shipping Destination on page 5 14 5 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 2 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 6 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 7 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0800 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information E codes continued Default Refer to Name Data setting range Uni n setting page ni LED Monitor Item selection Sped monitor select by E48 Output current Output voltage Calculated torque Input power PID command PID feedback amount Timer PID output Load factor Motor output Current position pulse count 6 Position deviation pulse count 6 LCD Monitor 3 Item selection L
289. sted Measures 1 The inverter output Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V terminals were and W and measure the interphase resistance of the wires Check short circuited if the resistance is too low gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 2 Ground faults occurred Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V at the inverter output and W and perform a Megger test terminals gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Loads were too heavy Measure the motor current with a measuring device and to trace the current trend Therefore use this information to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt If the load is too heavy decrease it or raise the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load variation smaller or raise the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 4 The value set for torque Check that the output current decreases and the motor does not boost F09 was too come to stall if you set a lower value than the current one for F09 large F37 A13 0 1 and AO5 3 or 4 5 The acceleration
290. sulation If they accidentally touch any of live parts in the main circuit their insulation coat may break for any reasons In such a case an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines Doing so could cause an accident or electric shock ACAUTION e Wire the three phase motor to terminals U V and W of the inverter aligning phases each other Otherwise injuries could occur The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent the motor from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur Operation AWARNING e Be sure to install the terminal cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the covers while power is applied Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock If the auto reset function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If the stall prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration and overload prevention control have been selected the inverter may operate at an acceleration deceleration time or frequency different from the commanded ones Design the m
291. t Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound carrier frequency F26 Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage Reconsider the data of function code H27 Check the connection and the resistance of the pull up resistor gt Correct the connections and replace the resistor with one with an appropriate resistance 6 15 Possible Causes 6 The value set for the torque boost F09 and A05 was too high 7 The V f pattern did not match the motor 8 Wrong settings What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F09 and A05 and readjust the data so that the motor does not stall even if you set the data to a lower value gt Readjust the data of the function codes F09 and AO5 Check if the base frequency F04 and A02 and rated voltage at base frequency F05 and A03 match the values on the nameplate on the motor gt Match the function code data to the values on the nameplate of the motor Although no PTC thermistor is used the thermistor H26 is active gt Set H26 Thermistor Mode selection to 0 Disable 9 cbH Braking resistor overheated Problem The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated Possible Causes 1 Braking load is too heavy 2 Deceleration time currently specified is too short 3 Wrong configuration of function codes F50 and F51 Wh
292. t x 150 Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Nominal l Reference current Output frequency for Characteristic applied Thermal time for setting the motor characteristic factor factor constant t motor Factory default thermal time kW ry constant Imax Allowable Base 0 1 to 22 continuous current frequency frequency x 150 x 33 E Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In general set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 Disable 5 26 E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes by factory default Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes in increments of 0 1 minute Example When the F12 data is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm TU condition alarm code iL when the output current of
293. t Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point Bias PID command 1 Bias value Bias base point Selection of Normal Inverse Operation Frequency command 1 0 0 to 400 0 ak Data Default copying i Incre Data setting range ment setting 3 0 0 00 to 400 00 1 0 01 0 00 to 400 00 1 0 01 0 Disable 1 Enable UP DOWN keys on keypad Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control 11 Digital I O interface option a 12 PGinterface card option 5 0 to 5 0 funn E oe i E ea ooy al JES s s 0 01 0 01 0 01 100 0 0 05 100 0 00 to 200 00 1 00 to 5 00 00 to 100 00 1 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar 5 0 to 5 0 0 01 0 01 0 01 100 0 0 05 100 0 00 to 200 00 1 00 to 5 00 00 to 100 00 1 5 0 to 5 0 100 0 0 05 100 0 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 00 to 200 00 1 00 to 5 00 00 to 100 00 1 100 00 to 100 00 0 01 0 01 Q oO gt fo Q 2 O jo 00 to 100 00 1 0 Normal operation Be J Q 1 Inverse operation Refer to page 5 55 a an 5 55 5 32 5 55 5
294. t Mode after Momentary Power 0 1 to 10 0 0 1 Y Y1 5 Failure Y2 Restart time Frequency fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected by F08 0 01 Hz s Y Y 0 01 to 100 00 999 Follow the current limit command ey aa 999 Automatically determined by inverter Mode selection 0 Disable 1 Enable With PTC the inverter immediately trips with 4 44 dis played 2 Enable With PTC the inverter issues output signal THM and continues to run 7 MT raa o ooo CC er e 5 68 NOoaFP WN OQ H42 H43 H44 H45 H47 H48 H49 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command Mode selection F01 C30 F02 RS 485 F02 F01 C30 RS 485 RS485 RS 485 RS 485 option F02 RS 485 option RS 485 F01 C30 RS 485 option RS 485 RS 485 option RS 485 option RS 485 option Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal fr 14 l I y N Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication of cumulative run time of cooling fan for replacement Startup Times of Motor 1 Indication of cumulative startup times Mock Alam 0 Disable 1 Enable Once a mock alarm occurs the data automatically retums to 0 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal Capacitor Printed Circuit Boards Hexadecimal Resettable Frequency 0 1 to 400 0 e PT 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage
295. t circuiting in the output circuit uT I LILL During deceleration Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from overcurrent due tO a ground f sssssseessserseesssrerseennn e fault in the output circuit This protection is During running effective only during startup of the inverter If at constant you turn ON the inverter without removing speed the ground fault this protection may not work TTI LiL I TUII Stops the inverter output upon detection of During Lili i Yes an overvoltage condition 400 VDC for acceleration three phase 200 V 800 VDC for three phase npn 400 V class series in the DC link bus During LILiC deceleration This protection is not assured if extremely large AC line voltage is applied inadvertently Tu 1I During running LILII at constant speed stopped LLI Yes 1 Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage level 200 VDC for three phase 200 V 400 VDC for three phase 400 V class series However if data 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This Yes function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this functio
296. t cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose If you are to use the MC for this purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually Note When your system requires the motor s driven by the inverter to be started stopped with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow If this is not necessary start stop the motor with the terminal commands FWD REV or with the keypad E At the output Secondary side Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter output and commercial factory power lines is connected to the inverter Note As application of high voltage external current to the inverter s output side may break the IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power supply to the commercial factory power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar E Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can
297. t life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Multi Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary e FRENIC Multi User s Manual MEH457 e RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may AN WARN N G lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may CAUT O N lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times
298. t to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Any of PID commands Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is and their feedback not set to 10 PID command or 12 PID feedback amount related functions is gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 disabled Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID feedback amount PID control is still in effect or JO1 is not set to 0 gt Set J01 to 1 Enable Process control normal operation or 2 Enable Process control inverse operation 2 Connection to the keypad was in poor Prior to proceed check that pressing the key does not take effect for the LED display connection Check connectivity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable 2 ____ under bar appears Problem Anunderbar ______ appeared on the LED monitor when you pressed the key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV The motor did not start Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The voltage of the DC Select 5_ under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in link bus was low Programming mode on the keypad and check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 3 E appears Problem Parentheses _ has appeared on
299. tarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is restored after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure 50 V for 200 V class series and 100 V for 400 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of Note undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors E Auto restart after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurr
300. te of purchase or 24 months from the manufacturing date imprinted on the name place whichever date is earlier 2 However in cases where the use environment conditions of use use frequency and times used etc have an effect on product life this warranty period may not apply 3 Furthermore the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric s Service Department is 6 months from the date that repairs are completed 7 9 2 Warranty range 1 In the event that breakdown occurs during the product s warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji Electric Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered However if the following cases are applicable the terms of this warranty may not apply S The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions environment handling or use methods etc which are not specified in the catalog operation manual specifications or other relevant documents The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji s product The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji s product such as the customer s equipment or software design etc Concerning the Fuji s programmable products the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company or the results from using such a program
301. ters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed 3 11 Table 3 9 Menus Available in Programming Mode LED monitor Main functions shows Refer to Displays only basic function codes to customize Section the inverter operation 3 4 1 F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Selecting each of Motor 1 parameters these function Seen Data Setting H codes codes enables 34 2 High performance functions t8 data to be _ _________ _ displayed changed A codes Motor 2 parameters J codes Application functions y codes Link functions o codes Optional function Displays only function codes that have been Section changed from their factory defaults You can refer 34 3 to or change those function code data 3 Drive Monitoring eaa Displays the running information required for Section maintenance or test running 3 4 4 4 I O Checking Displays external interface information oe 5 Maintenance Displays maintenance information including Section Information cumulative run time 3 4 6 Displays the recent four alarm codes You can aoe Section refer to the running information at the time when 347 the alarm occurred Note 1 Mounting an optional multi function keypad TP G1 adds the data copying function to the menu enabling reading writing and verifyin
302. the LED monitor while the keypad displaying the Drive Monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The data to be displayed Check that the product of the output frequency and the display could not fit the LED coefficient E50 does not exceed 9999 monitor e g overflown 5 Adjust the setting of E50 6 24 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation for a long time Take care of the following items during work A WARNING e Before proceeding to the maintenance and inspection turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic matter before starting work Use insulated tools Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect errors in the state of operation from the outside without removing the covers while the inverter operates or while it is turned ON Check if the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check if the surrounding environment satis
303. the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with N and V Notation Validating and saving function code data keys the change will not take effect Pressing the key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory Impossible E Copying data The data copying feature copies the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters The standard keypad does not support this feature The optional multi function keypad supports it with Menu 8 in Programming mode If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either If necessary set up uncopied code data manually and individually E Using negati
304. the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command Note Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command The abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break Setting E65 data at 999 Disable allows the Reference loss detected signal REF OFF to be issued but does not allow the reference frequency to change the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 0 or 999 the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 0 2 When E65 100 or higher the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 1 The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 5 54 C21 Timer Operation C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues for the timer count previously specified with the WO keys The operating procedure for the timer operation is given below Data for C21 Function 0 Disable timer operation 1 Enable timer operation Tip e Pressing the key during timer countdown quits the timer operation e Even if C21 1 setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the key e Applying terminal comm
305. the setting When any of the auto torque boost settings auto energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor E Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency H50 and H52 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 or H52 disables the non linear V f pattern operation E Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage H51 and H53 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern E Maximum Output Voltage F06 Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 CNote If FO5 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through eg H53 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant e When the auto torque boost F37 is enabled the non linear V f pattern takes no effect 5 21 Examples E Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Output frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F03 E V f pattern with two non linear points Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Non linear V f pattern 2 Voltage H53 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Output frequency
306. the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it Refer to HO9 Starting mode E Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters CF _e the alarm state with the alarm 2 5 displayed E Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 m Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E20 E21 Terminal Y1 and Y2 Function E27 Terminal 30A B C Function Relay output E20 E21 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 and Y2 are transistor outputs and terminals 30A B C are relay contact outputs In nor
307. ting electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Displays the frequency in accordance with signal output from the inverter FRENIC Multi series of inverters can be installed to your system panel or equipment using mounting adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for conventional inverters of FVR E11S series Three phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 75 and 3 7 4 0 kW Three phase 400 V 3 7 4 0 kW Single phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 4 and 2 2 kW This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC Multi series of inverters on the panel in such a way that the heat sink assembly may be exposed to the outside Using this adapter greatly reduces heat radiated or spread inside your panel Applicable only to inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 15 kW Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS 10 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification 10 1 1 General Originally the UL standards were established by Underwriters Laboratories Inc as private criteria for inspections investigations pertaining to fire accident insurance in the USA Later these standards were authorized as the official standards to protect operators service personnel and the general populace from fires and other accidents in the USA cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards cUL certified products are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards 10
308. to 200 Hz Storage ambient 25 to 70 C temperature Storage ambient ie 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed humidity External dimension Refer to Section 8 4 2 Standard keypad With a keypad rear Mass 35 grams cover Note When using an inverter in a place of an altitude within 1000 m to 3000 m you need to lower the output current of the inverter For details refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment 8 3 2 Communications specifications of keypad Table 8 2 Hardware specifications Items Specification Remarks For a remote site No of linkable unit One to one connection with an inverter i operation Extension cable for the US ANSI TIA EIA 568A category 5 compliant straight remote site operation type cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S and etc Link cable Maximum cable length seals Connector Standard RJ 45 connector jack Refer to Table 8 3 Table 8 3 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Connector Pin number Signal Description Remarks 1 and 8 Vcc Power supply lines for keypad 5 VDC 2 and 7 GND Reference potential OV 3 and 6 NC Reserved 4 DX RS 485 communications data line 5 DX RS 485 communications data line 8 5 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 1 Terminal functions For details about the main and control circuit terminals refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 and Section 2 3 6 Table 2 9
309. to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below Frequency command Initial frequency for UP DOWN control Switching command R H61 0 H61 1 Reference frequency given by the frequency command source used just before switching Other than UP DOWN Select frequency F01 C30 command 2 1 Hz2 Hz7 Cancel PID control Reference frequency given by PID control PID coneener Hz PID PID controller output Select multi frequency Reference Reference Multi frequency SS71 SS2 SS4 and frequency given frequency at the SS8 by the frequency time of previous command source UP DOWN control used just before switching Enable communications Communications link link via RS 485 or field bus LE Cote To enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands you need to set frequency Note command 1 F01 or frequency command 2 C30 to 7 beforehand 5 47 m Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 or the field bus option y98 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON Refer to H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function E Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Function code data 26 This digital terminal command determines at
310. tocoupler Current 3 Maximum motor current at ON 1 to 35 V Leakage current at OFF Figure 2 18 Transistor Output Circuit Figure 2 19 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC CN e When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a Note surge absorbing diode across relay s coil terminals e When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 50 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case CMY Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM s and 11 s common C E Connecting Programmable Logic Controller PLC to Terminal Y1 or Y2 Tip Figure 2 19 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for the Transistor output output lt Control circuit gt Programmable lt Control circuit gt Coo lt logic Sane logic controller Photocoupler Current ea Photocoupler Current r SINK input 24 VDC O YAVIy2 MvT SOURCE input a PLC serv
311. total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS 485 communication via the RJ 45 connector as standard since the power is turned ON Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Shows the most recent error that has occurred in standard RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since the power is turned ON Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS 485 communication since the power is turned ON Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Shows the most recent error that has occurred in optional RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448b Shows the option s ROM version as a 4 digit code Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the motor The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time 5_ 4 above 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverte
312. ue Limiter 1 20 to 200 Limiting level for driving 999 Disable F41 Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 Disable F42 Control Mode Selection 1 V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface F43 Current Limiter Disable No current limiter works 2 Note 5 38 Mode selection Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC Enable during ACC constant speed operation F44 180 Note F50 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 to 900 for Braking Resistor 999 Disable Discharging capability 0 Reserved F51 Allowable average loss 0 001 to 50 000 0 000 Reserved The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup Note Default settings for inverters with inverter s ROM version 0799 or earlier F43 0 and F44 200 For the inverter s ROM version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Shipping Destination on page 5 14 5 2 E codes Extension Terminal Functions ro Default Refer to Data setting range ment copying setting page running Terminal X1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to ia a es Se 5 40 t
313. ue vector control with optional PG interface E V f control In this control the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes E Slip compensation Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation facility first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency PO9 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking H68 enables or disables the slip compensation facility according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone Data for Base f Above the base H68 Accl Decel Constant speed re ae e Enable Enable 1 Disable Enabie Enable Enable Disable Disable E Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and s
314. ultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 D il Multiple alarm 2 n AOS is displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under communications control displayed with the ON OFF of Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals LED segments under RS 485 communications control Refer to Terminal input signal status a Disolavi trol VO si ft l d cae under communications control SAS pa ying COMOL signal te nies UNUeEr in hexadecimal format communications control in Section 3 4 5 Checking Terminal output signal status I O signal status for details under communications control in hexadecimal format Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm Cote When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm information 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor E Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the key only when the latest alarm code is displayed E Displaying the a
315. unications error occurred between the standard keypad or the multi function keypad and the inverter Possible Causes 1 Break in the communications cable or poor contact 2 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter 3 The keypad malfunctioned 14 amp 3 CPU error What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Check that alarm 4 does not occur if you connect another keypad to the inverter gt Replace the keypad Problem A CPU error e g erratic CPU operation occurred Possible Causes 1 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable gt Improve noise control 15 amp 4 Option card communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter Possible Causes 1 There was a problem with the connection between the option card and the inverter 2 There was a high intensity noise fro
316. uppression auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control and droop control overload stop function then check that the motor vibration comes to a stop gt Cancel the functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the data of the output current fluctuation damping gain H80 and A41 Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound Tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 0 5 If grating sound can be heard from motor Possible Causes 1 The carrier frequency was set too low 2 The ambient temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 3 Resonance with the load What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound Tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Readjust the setting of F27 to appropriate value Measure the temperature inside the panel of the inverter gt If it is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load In the case of a fan or a pump lower the setting data of the frequency limiter F15 Note If you disable H98 an 4i or LiL Li alarm may occur Check the precision of the mounting of t
317. ure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install an MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD ELCB when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 Note 3 Note 4 8 6 8 4 3 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Running the inverter by terminal commands Note 2 MCCB or Note 3 DBR MC a T geste cee Ne at Power supply ae ous Note 1 TE CM Single phase ne ee L1 L DCR E E eM 200 V class series i A 4 i i BE THR Note 4 200 to 240V x A 5 LOIN IE 50 60 Hz Ra aA OPT Ogge 7 Note 2 i ower supply MCCB or Note 3 S a a Main circuit Three phase RCD ELCB MC o Main circuit 200 V class series EA ae ee T a ae ae Mon Motor 50 60 Hz i A i Three phase l ao 400 V class series e gee 380 to 480 V Loom E E 50 60 Hz L3 T 3 Grounding terminal p 6c ce Grounding terminal le ae eee a i eee aS
318. ures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel well Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Check the cumulative running time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates abnormally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before the overload protection occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload prevention control H70 6 14 nm 7 GHe Alarm issued by an external device Problem External alarm was inputted THR when Enable external alarm trip THR is assigned to one of digital input terminals X1 through X5 FWD and REV Possible Causes 1 An alarm function of the external equipment was activated 2 Connection has been performed incorrectly 3 Incorrect settings What to Check and Suggested Measures Inspect external equipment operation gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred Check if the wire for the external alarm signal is correctly connected
319. urrently specified OFF ON Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified ON ON Keep the current output frequency 5 46 The UP DOWN control is available in two modes one mode H61 0 in which the initial value of the reference frequency is fixed to 0 00 at the start of the UP DOWN control and the other mode H61 1 in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP DOWN control applies as the initial value When H61 0 the reference frequency applied by the previous UP DOWN control has been cleared to 0 so at the next restart including powering on use the UP terminal command to accelerate the speed as needed When H61 1 the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering on At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the Cnote internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency The previous frequency held will be overwritten by the current one Frequency i Frequency saved in internal memory Output frequency Run command ON OFF ON UP terminal command Oo Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched
320. urs the counter will be reset to O and the count will start again Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued CONE 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 big No of startups is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again et DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit LILI voltage Unit V volts 3 26 Table 3 21 Alarm Information Displayed Continued LED monitor shows Item displayed Description item No Shows the temperature of the heat sink Max temperature of heat sink Unit C nit Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status for details Terminal input signal status in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal format aes No of consecutive This is the number of times the same alarm occurs nes occurrences consecutively Al ie Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 D Aa Multiple alarm 1 i deed cad l is displayed if no alarms have occurred en ts Sim
321. ut P1 Control L1 R L2 S L3 T Pagi ee 3 3 P 30 p 2 5 2 5 Pa E a FRNO 4E1 40 FRNO 75E1 40 FRN1 5E1 40 FRN2 2E1 40 poe 2i zE T FRN3 7E1 40 T 4 0 FRN4 0E1 4E 5 5 FRN5 5E1m 40 15 P20 30 60 40 40 15 FRN15E1m 40 10 60 60 0 1 FRNO 1E1 70 0 2 FRNO 2E1 70 Ez FRN0 4E1 70 R 2 5 i FRNO75E1m 70 10 FRN1 5E1m 70 15 MCCB Molded case circuit breaker RCD Residual current operated protective device ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker Note 2 A box O in the above table replaces A C J or K depending on the shipping destination for three phase 200 V and FRN3 7E1 40 A box O in the above table replaces A C E J or K depending on the shipping destination for single phase 200 V and three phase 400 V except FRN3 7E1 40 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at an ambient temperature of 40 C In the case of no DC reactor the wire sizes are determined on the basis of the effective input current calculated under the condition that the power supply capacity and impedance are 500 kVA and 5 respectively vii Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards cUL certification If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with UL cUL are considered as compliant with the UL and CSA cUL certified standards ACAUTIO
322. ve logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Some signals cannot switch to active OFF depending upon their assigned functions Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 using any of function codes E01 through E05 Function code data BX T7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF 5 2 Overview of Function Codes This section provides an overview of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC Multi series of inverter For details about the function codes given below and other function codes not given below refer to the
323. wing conditions Motor Sound carrier frequency F26 15 kHz Wiring length of the shielded cable between the inverter and motor 10 m 10 3 2 Recommended installation procedure To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive have certified technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below E In the case of EMC filter built in type of inverters with a capacity of 4 0 kW or below 1 Mount the EMC grounding flange that comes with the inverter to the inverter with screws in order to ground the wire shield s See Figure 10 1 RoOoOnoo_ poum pouont o o teto Fo o a W Figure 10 1 Attaching the EMC Grounding Flange 9 o 2 eH l MUL 2 Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route it as short as possible Firmly clamp the wire shield to the flange to ground it Further connect the wire shield electrically to the grounding terminal of motor See Figure 10 2 3 Use shielded wire for connection around the control terminals of the inverter and also for connection of the signal cable of an RS 485 Communications As with the motor clamp the shield wire firmly to a grounded plate See Figure 10 2 10 2 4 In the case of FRNO 75E1E 70 motor cable shall be wired through the ring core that comes with the inverter and the ring core shall be fixed by the EMC grounding flange EMC Grounding Flange for EMC comPliance
324. y capacity Three phase 400 V Cc 0 2 oO 0 0 G Q 0 Q When connecting the inverter to the power supply add a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of power supply Do not use the devices with the rated current out of the recommenced range Fire could occur lt 0 2 oO 6b 0 Ken Q 0 Q Name of peripheral equipment Magnetic contactor MC Function and application An MC can be used at both the power input primary and output Secondary sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter an MC can also switch the motor drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines E At the power supply primary side Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to 1 Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply generally commercial factory power lines with the protection function built into the inverter or with the terminal signal line 2 Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures 3 Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the power supply side canno
325. y setting 50 0 Hz Three phase 200 V class series 200 V Three phase 400 V class series 400 V Applicable motor rated capacity Rated current of applicable motor 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors 60 0 Hz 6 0 s 6 0 s In any of the following cases the default settings may not produce the best results for auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiter automatic deceleration auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop since the standard settings of motor parameters for Fuji motors are not applicable Tune the motor parameters according to the procedure set forth below The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product e The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long e Areactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter A codes are used to specify the data for motor 2 Use them if necessary lt Tuning procedure gt 1 Preparation Referring to the rating plate on the motor set the following function codes to their nominal ratings e F04 and A02 Base frequency e F05 and AO3 Rated voltage at base frequency e PO2 and A16 Rated capacity e PO3 and A17 Rated current 4 2 2 Selection of tuning process Check the situation of the machine system and choose between Tuning while the motor is stopped P04 or A18 1 and Tuning while the mot
326. y to have the corresponding alarm item number e g 4_Z 1 and data e g Output frequency displayed alternately in intervals of T approximately 1 second You can also have the item number e g 5_L and data e g Output current for any other item displayed using the A and Q keys Press the key to return to a list of alarm codes Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 21 Alarm Information Displayed shows Item displayed Description LI_L I 6L Output frequency Output frequency Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage II 7 I LIL ae Calculated L I DLII Calculated motor output torque iL pelstelice Frequency specified by frequency command 1 LIT frequency q y Sp y treq y po ae Rotational This shows the rotational direction being output ror direction forward reverse Ae Rinimnastms This shows the running status in hexadecimal Refer to IIE g E Displaying running status in Section 3 4 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Z Z L L L LiL Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total Z n7 Cumulative run LI_L I time time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 ho
327. you can take the heat sink out of the equipment or the panel as shown on the right so that cooling is done both internally and externally this is called external cooling In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the equipment or the panel As a result much less heat is radiated inside the equipment or the panel To take advantage of external cooling you need to use the external cooling attachment option for inverters with a capacity of 5 5 kW or above In an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust however do not use external cooling in an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust which tends to clog the heat sink LL For details External Cooling refer to the Mounting Adapter for PB F1 E1 _ Installation Manual INR SI47 0880a A CAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink This may result in a fire or accident External heat radiation 70 Internal heat radiation PN T Cooling 20 Sf fans Internal fans Internal Heat temperature sink of the panel Max 50 C Internal air intake External air intake Equipment panel Figure 2 2 External Cooling 2 2 3 Mounting direction Mount the inverter vertically to the mounting surface and fix it se

INR-SI47-1094c_E - Fuji Electric GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents